FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF USER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF USER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF OWNER GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF OWNER MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF REFERENCE GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF INSTRUCTION GUIDE
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF REFERENCE MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FREE ENGLISH PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS


CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF MANUAL

If this is not the document you want for this product, click here to see if we have any other documents for this product.

What are the basic safety warnings for this projector?

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED.

WARNING: To prevent damage which may result in fire or shock hazard, do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.

WARNING: Remove the plug from the mains socket when this unit is not in use for a prolonged period of time.

WARNING: To prevent electric shock, do not remove cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel.

WARNING: Do not remove the earthing pin on the mains plug. This apparatus is equipped with a three prong earthing-type mains plug. This plug will only fit an earthing-type mains socket. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the mains socket, contact an electrician. Do not defeat the purpose of the earthing plug.

WARNING: This equipment is compliant with Class A of CISPR32. In a residential environment this equipment may cause radio interference.

CAUTION: To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions. This includes using the provided power cord and shielded interface cables when connecting to computer or peripheral devices. Also, any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment could void the user’s authority to operate this device.

WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DON’T OPEN

WARNING: Do not look at the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.

WARNING (for USA and Canada): MOUNT ABOVE THE HEADS OF CHILDREN. The use of a ceiling mount is recommended with this projector to place it above the eyes of children.


What are the warnings and cautions related to laser safety?

This projector is the Class 1 laser product that complies with IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.

RISK GROUP 3

WARNING: POSSIBLY HAZARDOUS OPTICAL RADIATION EMITTED FROM THIS PRODUCT.

HAZARD DISTANCE: REFER TO THE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.

DO NOT LOOK INTO THE BEAM.

NO DIRECT EYE EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM IS PERMITTED.

CAUTION: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING: Do not look at or place your skin into the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used. Do not enter the projection luminous flux using an optical device (such as magnifier or mirror). Doing so can cause burns or loss of sight.

Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not look at or place your hands directly into this light.

Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and switch off the main power when you are away from the projector.

Directing a high-power laser beam onto the projection lens surface can damage the DLP chips. By closing the mechanical shutter built into the projector, it can prevent damaging of the DLP chips by a high-power laser beam while using the shutter function (shutter: closed). To close the mechanical shutter while using the shutter function, set [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] to [ENABLE]. For details of the setting, refer to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu -> [SHUTTER SETTING].


What is the hazard distance (HD) and hazard zone (HZ) for this projector?

The distance from the projection lens surface, at which the emission reaches the Accessible Emission Limit (AEL) of risk group 2, is known as the hazard distance (HD) or safety distance. The area where the emission exceeds the Accessible Emission Limit of risk group 2 is called the hazard zone (HZ).

Within the hazard zone, never look into the light projected from the projector. The eyes may be damaged by direct irradiation even if you look at the light just for a moment. If you are outside the hazard zone, it is considered to be safe in all circumstances except deliberately staring into the light projected from the projector.

Combinations with any projection lens are categorized as risk group 3 for this projector.

Each dimension inside the hazard zone for combination with projection lens which the hazard distance exceeds 1 m (39-3/8″) is as follows (Unit: m):

Projection lens Model No. HD*1 D1*2 D2*2 D3*2 D4*2
ET-D3LES20
ET-D75LE20
1.5 0.37 0.37 0.38 0.38
ET-D3LET30
ET-D75LE30
3.3 0.42 0.42 0.43 0.43
ET-D3LET80
ET-D75LE8
4.5 0.19 0.19 0.20 0.20

*1 HD: Hazard Distance

*2 The values of D1 to D4 will change in accordance with the lens shift amount. Each value in the table is the maximum value.

Note:

The value in the table is based on IEC/EN 62471-5:2015.

Projection lens compatible with the projector may be added or changed without prior notice. For the latest information, visit the following website: https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

Attention:

If the light projected from the projector directly enters the eyes while you are inside the hazard zone, the retinas may be damaged. Do not enter the hazard zone during use. Alternatively, install the projector in a location where the projected light will not directly enter the eyes.


What are the power-related safety warnings and cautions?

WARNING:

The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply immediately. Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in fire or electric shock, or will cause visual impairment.

• If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.

• If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.

• If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.

Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.

During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable. Electric shocks can result.

Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug. If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or fire will result.

• Do not damage the power cord, make any modifications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.

Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.

Do not use anything other than the provided power cord. Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks or fire. Please note that if you do not use the provided power cord to ground the device on the side of the outlet, this may result in electric shocks.

Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal. If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.

• Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.

Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands. Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.

Use an outlet supporting 15 A independently. Using an outlet together with another device may result in fires due to heat generation.

Do not overload the wall outlet. If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and fire will result.

Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust. Failure to observe this will cause a fire.

• If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.

• If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power plug out from the wall outlet.

Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.


CAUTION:

When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector. If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and fire, short-circuits or serious electric shocks will result.

When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet. Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock.

Before replacing the projection lens, be sure to turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.

• Unexpected projection of light may cause injury to eyes.

• Replacing the projection lens without removing the power plug may result in electric shock.

Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before attaching or removing the Function Board (optional) and performing maintenance. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.


What are the warnings and cautions for use and installation?

WARNING: ON USE/INSTALLATION

Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats. Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, fire or damage to the projector.

Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into contact with oily smoke or steam. Using the projector under such conditions will result in fire, electric shocks or deterioration of components. Oil may also distort the plastic and the projector could fall such as when mounted on the ceiling.

Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable. Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage could result.

Do not install the projector in a location where people pass through. People may bump into the projector or trip on the power cord, which may result in fire, electric shock, or injury.

Install the projector in a location sufficiently away from surrounding walls and objects so that air ventilation is not obstructed. Failure to observe this will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause fire or damage to the projector.

• Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.

• Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the intake vent.

Do not project an image with the lens cover of the projection lens (optional) attached. Doing so can cause fire.

Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector. High voltages can cause fire or electric shocks.

• For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.

Do not allow metal objects, flammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow the projector to get wet. Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in fire, electric shock, or malfunction of the projector.

• Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.

• If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.

• Particular attention must be paid to children.

Use the ceiling mount bracket specified by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specified one will result in falling accidents.

• Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.

Installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling should only be carried out by a qualified technician. If installation is not carried out and secured correctly, it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.


CAUTION: ON USE/INSTALLATION

Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector. Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.

Do not put your weight on this projector. You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.

• Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.

Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations. Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in fire.

• Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near heaters.

Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens. Failure to observe this could cause injury.

Do not install the projector in a location where salt pollution or corrosive gas may occur. Doing so may result in falling due to corrosion. Also, it may result in malfunctions.

Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used. Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.

• Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.

Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used. Do not block the projection by placing an object in front of the projection lens. Doing so can cause fire, damage to an object, or malfunction of the projector.

• Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.

The projector must be carried or installed by two or more people. Failure to do so may cause falling accidents.

Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector. Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause fire or electric shocks to occur.

When mounting the projector on the ceiling, keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with metal parts inside the ceiling. Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.


What are the safety precautions for handling batteries (for remote control)?

WARNING: ACCESSORIES

Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following. Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire.

• Do not use unspecified batteries.

• Do not charge dry cell batteries.

• Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.

• Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or fire.

• Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as necklaces or hairpins.

• Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.

• Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.

• Make sure the polarities (+ and -) are correct when inserting the batteries.

• Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.

• Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.

If the battery fluid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.

• Battery fluid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inflammation or injury. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.

• Battery fluid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight. In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.

Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.

• Leaving them in the unit may result in fluid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.

CAUTION: ACCESSORIES

When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote control. Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch fire or explode, which may result in fire or contamination of surrounding area.


What are the precautions for viewing 3D video (PT-RZ24K and PT-RZ17K only)?

CAUTION: VIEWING 3D VIDEO

Those with a medical history of oversensitivity to light, heart problems, or poor physical health should not view 3D images. This may lead to a worsening of medical conditions.

If you feel tiredness or discomfort, or other abnormality while viewing with 3D Eyewear, discontinue viewing. Continuing use may cause health problems. Take a break as necessary.

When viewing 3D movies, aim to view one movie at a time and take a break as necessary.

When viewing 3D images, for example when playing 3D games or using a PC where two way interaction is possible, take an appropriate break every 30 to 60 minutes. Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.

When preparing contents, use contents properly created to be used for 3D. This may cause eye fatigue or health problems.

When viewing 3D images, pay attention to people and objects in the vicinity. 3D video may be mistaken for actual objects, and the related bodily movements can cause damage to objects and lead to injury.

Use 3D Eyewear when viewing 3D videos.

Do not tilt your head when viewing with 3D Eyewear.

Those who are near or far sighted, those with weaker eyesight in one eye, or those with astigmatism should use corrective glasses etc. when using 3D Eyewear.

If the image appears distinctly double when viewing 3D video, discontinue viewing. Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.

View at a distance of at least three times the effective height of the screen. Viewing at distance closer than the recommended distance may cause eye fatigue. As with movies, if there are black bands at the top and bottom of the video, view at a distance of 3 times or more of the height of the video section.

Children younger than 5 or 6 years old should not use 3D Eyewear. As it is difficult to gauge the reactions of children to fatigue and discomfort their condition may worsen suddenly. If a child uses the 3D Eyewear, guardians should beware of the child’s eyes becoming tired.


How do I replace the fuse in the UK mains plug?

This appliance is supplied with a molded three pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced, please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.

Check for the ASTA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse.

If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from an Authorized Service Center.

How to replace the fuse: Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver and replace the fuse.

IMPORTANT: Wiring Code

The wires in this mains lead are colored in accordance with the following code:

Green – and – Yellow: Earth

Blue: Neutral

Brown: Live

The wire which is colored GREEN – AND – YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN – AND – YELLOW.

The wire which is colored BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or colored BLACK.

The wire which is colored BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or colored RED.


What are the Quick Steps to get the projector running?

1. Set up the projector.

2. Attach the projection lens (optional).

3. Connect with external devices.

4. Connect the power cord.

5. Switch on the projector.

6. Make initial settings (Take this step when you switch on the power for the first time after purchasing the projector).

7. Select the input signal.

8. Adjust the image.


What are the intended use and installation requirements (USA/Canada)?

Intended use of the product: The purpose of the projector is to project an image signal from imaging equipment or a computer on a screen or other surface as a still image or moving image.

Installation and handling of the laser product (for USA and Canada):

For permanent Installation:

• Installation of the projector shall be performed by a technician trained by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

• The variance application to the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA variance application) will be performed by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. The person responsible of the device or usage shall store the original or a copy of the FDA variance approval letter received from Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

For temporary installation:

• Installation of the projector shall be performed by a technician trained by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

• Owner of the projector or the person responsible of usage such as the promotor of the show shall apply for FDA variance and acquire the approval letter.

• The variance holder who has acquired the FDA variance approval letter must submit the “installation checklist” required by FDA to Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd.

• Variance holder shall create and store a document recording the information such as the location of the use, dates of the use, users of the projector.

For use:

• This projector is categorized as the risk group 3 of IEC/EN 62471-5:2015.

• Do not enter within the hazard distance (within RG3 range).

• Assign a person responsible of the device when using the projector. The person responsible shall be trained by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. before starting to use the projector.


What precautions should be taken when transporting the projector?

• Transport the projector with two or more people. Failure to do so may drop the projector, which may result in damage or deformation of the projector, or injury.

• When transporting the projector, hold it securely by its bottom and avoid excessive vibration and impact. Failure to do so may cause a failure due to the damaged internal components.

• Do not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.


What are the precautions for installing the projector?

• Do not set up the projector outdoors. The projector is designed for indoor use only.

• Do not set up the projector in the following locations:

• Places where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal components or malfunction.

• Location close to sea or where corrosive gas may occur: The projector may fall due to corrosion. Also, failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.

• Near the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may fluctuate in rare cases due to the heated air from the exhaust vent or the hot or cooled air from the air conditioner. Make sure that the exhaust from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward the front of the projector.

• Places with sharp temperature fluctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of the light source, or result in deformation of the projector due to heat, which may cause malfunctions. Follow the operating environment temperature of the projector.

• Near high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.

• Places where there is high-power laser equipment: Directing a laser beam onto the projection lens surface causes damage to the DLP chips.

• Ask a qualified technician or your dealer for the installation work such as installing to a ceiling, etc. To ensure projector performance and security, ask a qualified technician or your dealer when installing the projector in a method other than the floor installation or when installing the projector in a high place.

• Ask a qualified technician or your dealer to install the cable wiring for DIGITAL LINK connection. Image and sound may be disrupted if cable transmission characteristics cannot be obtained due to inadequate installation.

• The projector may not work properly due to strong radio wave from the broadcast station or the radio. If there is any facility or equipment which outputs strong radio waves near the installation location, install the projector at a location sufficiently far from the source of the radio waves.

• Projected image of the projector is affected by the ambient temperature around the projector or the increased internal temperature caused by the light from its light source, and it will be unstable especially right after the projection has started. It is recommended to adjust the image after at least 30 minutes (or 1 hour for ET-D3LEW200/ET-D3LEU100) have elapsed with the focus test pattern displayed.

• Do not install the projector at an altitude of 4 200 m (13 780′) or higher above sea level.

• Do not use the projector in a location where the ambient temperature exceeds 45 °C (113 °F) (between 0-1400m) or 40 °C (104 °F) (between 1400-4200m). Do not use above 40 °C (104 °F) if the optional Wireless Module (AJ-WM50 Series) is attached.


What cautions should be observed when setting up the projector?

• Install the projector in a place or with a mount that can sufficiently tolerate the weight. The position of the projected image may shift if the strength is not sufficient.

• Use the adjustable feet only for the floor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using them for other purposes may damage the projector.

• The adjustable feet can be removed if not needed. However, do not use the screw holes where the feet were removed for other purposes like fixing to a mount. Do not attach screws not instructed into these holes.

• When using a method other than floor installation or ceiling mounting bracket, remove the four adjustable feet and use the six screw holes shown in the PDF to fix the projector to a mount. Ensure no clearance between the screw holes and the setting surface by using metallic spacers.

• Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten fixing screws to specified torques (M6 screw, 16 mm tapping depth, 4 ± 0.5 N·m). Do not use electric/impact screwdrivers. Use ISO 898-1 standard screws.

• Do not stack three or more projectors.

• Do not simultaneously use both projectors when stacked. Use one as a backup device.

• Do not use the projector supporting it by the top.

• Do not block the intake/exhaust vents.

• Prevent hot/cool air from air conditioning or other projectors from blowing directly onto vents.

• Maintain clearance: At least 200 mm (7-7/8″) from side walls/objects, 300 mm (11-13/16″) from rear wall if intake vents face rear, 500 mm (19-11/16″) from rear wall if exhaust vents face rear.

• Do not install the projector in a confined space without separate air conditioning or ventilation.

• When installing on ceiling/wall, ensure fixing screws/power cord do not contact metal parts inside.

• Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for damage caused by inappropriate installation location.

• Immediately remove the product that is not in use anymore by asking a qualified technician.


What security measures should be taken when using the projector and network features?

When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents:

• Personal information being leaked via this product

• Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party

• Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party

Take sufficient security measures:

• Make your password difficult to guess as much as possible.

• Change your password periodically.

• Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. or its affiliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge your password in case you receive such inquiries.

• The connecting network must be secured by a firewall, etc.

Security when using the wireless LAN product:

Be aware of risks like data interception and illegal access. Make appropriate security settings for the wireless LAN device. Be sure to make all security related settings according to the operation instructions supplied with each wireless LAN device before using it.


What should I know about using the wireless LAN feature?

• Radio wave in the 2.4 GHz band is used.

• To use the wireless LAN function, attach the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series).

• Do not use close to other wireless devices operating in the same band (microwave ovens, industrial/scientific/medical devices, in-plant wireless stations, specified low power wireless stations) as communication may be disabled or slowed down due to interference.

• Do not use cell phone, television, or radio as much as possible close to the projector. Noise may occur in the audio or video due to radio waves from these devices.

• Radio waves for wireless LAN communication do not go through reinforcing bars, metal, or concrete.

• Do not use the projector as much as possible in a location where static electricity is generated, as communication may be prone to disruption.


What application software is supported by the projector?

The projector supports the following application software:

Logo Transfer Software: Transfers an original image (e.g., company logo) to be projected at the start.

Smart Projector Control: Sets and adjusts the projector connected to the network using a smartphone or tablet.

Multi Monitoring & Control Software: Monitors and controls multiple display devices connected to an intranet.

Early Warning Software: Plug-in for Multi Monitoring & Control Software that monitors device status, notifies of abnormalities, and predicts maintenance timing. (License purchase required for continuous use after 90 days).

Geometric & Setup Management Software (Geometry Manager Pro): Performs detailed corrections and adjustments like geometric adjustment, edge blending, color, and brightness adjustments, potentially using a camera for automation.

Projector Network Setup Software: Sets network information (IP address, projector name) for multiple projectors collectively. Can also set administrator accounts for projectors without one.

Note: Download links and registration requirements are mentioned in the PDF.


How should the projector be stored and disposed of?

Storing: To store the projector, store in a dry room.

Disposal: To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal. Also, dispose of the product without disassembling.


What are general cautions on using the projector?

To get a good picture quality: Prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from shining onto the screen.

Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands. If the surface becomes dirty, this will be magnified and projected. Attach the supplied lens cover when not using the projector.

DLP chips: These are precision-made. In rare cases, pixels might be missing or always lit; this is not a malfunction.

Do not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating. Doing so may shorten the life of the built-in motor.

Light source: Uses laser diode. Luminance decreases with higher operating temperature and duration of use. If brightness is noticeably reduced or the light source does not turn on, ask your dealer to clean inside or replace the light source unit.

Computer and external device connections: Read the manual carefully regarding power cords and shielded cables.


What accessories are supplied with the projector?

The following accessories are provided:

• Wireless/wired remote control unit <1> (N2QAYB001176)

• Power cord (Quantity and type vary by region, e.g., K2CM3YY00057, K2CT3YY00101, K2CG3YY00236, K2CG3YY00218, K2CZ3YY00100, K2CH3YY00009, K2CZ3YY00032)

• Lens hole cover <1> (1GE1RZ21K) (Attached at purchase)

• AA/R6 or AA/LR6 battery <2> (For remote control unit)

• Lens fixing screw <1> (XYN4+J18FJ)

• SLOT adapter <1> (DPVF2722YA/X1)

Attention:

• After unpacking, discard packaging material properly.

• Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.

• For missing accessories, consult your dealer.

• Store small parts appropriately and keep them away from small children.


What optional accessories are available?

Optional accessories (product name) Model No.
Projection lens Zoom Lens ET-D3LEW10, ET-D3LES20, ET-D3LET30, ET-D3LET40, ET-D3LEW60, ET-D3LET80, ET-D3LEW200, ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8*1, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20, ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40
Fixed-focus Lens ET-D3LEW50, ET-D3LEU100, ET-D75LE95
Fisheye Lens ET-D3LEF70
Stepping Motor Kit ET-D75MKS10
Lens Fixed Attachment ET-PLF10, ET-PLF20
Ceiling Mount Bracket ET-PKD520H (for High Ceilings)
ET-PKD520S (for Low Ceilings)
ET-PKD521B (Projector Mount Bracket)
Function Board 12G-SDI Terminal Board*1 TY-SB01QS
DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board*1 TY-SB01DL
Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board*1 TY-SB01WP
Wireless Module*1 AJ-WM50 Series*2
Early Warning Software (Basic license/3-year license) ET-SWA100 Series*3
NFC Upgrade Kit*1 ET-NUK10
Digital Interface Box ET-YFB100G
DIGITAL LINK Switcher ET-YFB200G

*1 Availability varies by country. Contact dealer.

*2 Suffix varies by country.

*3 Suffix varies by license type.

Note: Refer to the PDF for additional notes on lens compatibility, motor types, NFC availability, and connection requirements.


How do I insert and remove batteries from the remote control?

1. Press the guide on the back cover and lift the cover off.

2. Insert two AA/R6 or AA/LR6 batteries, ensuring the (+) and (-) terminals are correctly aligned (insert the (-) side first).

3. Replace the cover.

• To remove the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.


How do I set up the remote control for use with multiple projectors?

When using multiple projectors together, you can operate them simultaneously or individually with a single remote control by assigning a unique ID number to each projector.

1. After completing the initial projector setup, set the ID number for each projector body using the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID] setting.

2. Set the ID number on the remote control to match the projector you want to control. (The factory default ID for both projector and remote is [ALL]).

To set the remote control ID:

1. Press the button.

2. Press the number buttons (<0> – <9>) to enter the desired ID number (1-64). Use <0> for [ALL].

3. Press the button again to confirm.


How can I connect the remote control to the projector using a cable?

If you need to control multiple projectors reliably or if obstacles might block the infrared signal, you can connect the remote control using commercially available M3 stereo mini jack cables.

1. Connect one end of the cable to the wired terminal on the remote control (bottom).

2. Connect the other end to the terminal on the projector.

3. To control multiple projectors in a daisy chain, connect a cable from the terminal of the first projector to the terminal of the second projector, and so on.

Attention: Use a cable that is 15 m (49’3″) or shorter, with 2 core shielded. The remote control may not operate if the cable is longer or if the shielding is inadequate.


What type of power outlet is required and how do I set the installation mode?

Usable outlet:

• The projector supports AC 200 V to AC 240 V, and AC 100 V to AC 120 V.

• A grounded outlet supporting 15 A is required.

• Use the supplied power cord and ensure it matches the voltage and outlet shape.

• Note: Maximum light output is limited at 100-120V.

Installation mode:

Set the installation mode in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD].

Installation Type [FRONT/REAR] Setting [FLOOR/CEILING] Setting
Setting on a desk/floor and projecting forward [FRONT] [AUTO] or [FLOOR]
Setting on a desk/floor and projecting from rear [REAR] [AUTO] or [FLOOR]
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward [FRONT] [AUTO] or [CEILING]
Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear [REAR] [AUTO] or [CEILING]
Portrait setting and projecting forward [FRONT] Set in accordance with the image to project
Portrait setting and projecting from the rear [REAR] Set in accordance with the image to project

Note: The projector has a built-in angle sensor that can automatically detect the attitude when [FLOOR/CEILING] is set to [AUTO] (detects within ±30° of horizontal). For portrait setting, the OSD can be rotated via the [OSD ROTATION] setting.


How do I adjust the adjustable feet?

The projection angle can be adjusted by turning the adjustable feet located at the front corners of the projector base. Rotate the feet manually to raise or lower the front of the projector as needed.

Use the adjustable feet only for floor standing installation and angle adjustment.


How do I attach the projection lens?

1. Remove the lens hole cover from the projector body.

2. Remove the body cap from the lens mount section of the projector by rotating it counterclockwise.

3. Remove the rear cap from the projection lens.

4. Align the red dot (positioning mark) on the projection lens with the red dot on the projector’s lens mount section.

5. Insert the projection lens into the projector body and rotate it clockwise until it clicks into place.

6. Secure the projection lens using the supplied lens fixing screw.


How do I remove the projection lens?

1. Loosen the lens fixing screw until it turns freely.

2. While pressing the lens release button on the projector body, rotate the projection lens counterclockwise until it stops.

3. Carefully remove the projection lens from the projector body.

4. Attach the body cap to the projector and the rear cap to the projection lens.


What steps should be taken before installing or removing an optional Function Board?

Before installing or removing the Function Board:

1. Turn off the

switch on the projector.

2. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.

3. Wait until the projector has sufficiently cooled down.

4. Take precautions against static electricity (e.g., touch a metal object to discharge static).

5. Handle the Function Board carefully by its edges; do not touch the components or connector sections.


How do I install an optional Function Board?

1. Loosen the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover from the projector.

2. If installing an Intel® SDM-S specification Function Board, attach the supplied SLOT adapter to the board first.

3. Carefully align and insert the Function Board into the slot until it is fully seated.

4. Secure the Function Board using the two fixing screws removed in step 1.


How do I remove an optional Function Board?

1. Loosen the two fixing screws securing the Function Board.

2. Carefully pull the Function Board straight out of the slot.

3. Reattach the slot cover using the two fixing screws.


What should I do before connecting external devices?

Before connecting:

• Turn off the power switch of both the projector and the external device(s).

• Read the operating manual for the device(s) being connected.

• Use the correct type of shielded interface cables for the connection.

• Ensure connectors are inserted fully and securely.


How do I connect the power cord?

1. Connect the power cord connector securely into the terminal on the projector.

2. Secure the power cord using the power cord holder to prevent accidental disconnection.

3. Plug the power cord plug into a grounded wall outlet matching the cord’s specifications.


What do the different states of the Power Indicator mean?

Indicator status Projector status
Off The
switch is set to , or the power cord is not plugged in.
Lit red The projector is in standby mode.
Blinking red (slow) The projector is shutting down (cooling fan running). Do not turn off
or unplug.
Blinking red (fast) An internal error occurred. Check the self-diagnosis display.
Lit green The projector is on (projecting).
Blinking green (slow) The projector is warming up after being turned on.
Blinking green (fast) A remote control signal is being received.
Lit orange The projector is in standby mode with specific network/serial functions enabled (e.g., [STANDBY MODE] set to [NORMAL]).
Blinking orange (slow) The projector is shutting down to orange standby mode.
Blinking orange (fast) An internal error occurred while in orange standby mode. Check the self-diagnosis display.

How do I switch the projector on?

1. Ensure the power cord is connected.

2. Set the

switch on the projector body to . The power indicator will light red or orange.

3. Press the button on the remote control or the control panel. The power indicator will blink green and then light green when the projector is ready.


How do I perform the initial setup when turning the projector on for the first time?

When you switch on the power for the first time after purchase, the initial setting screen appears. Follow these steps:

1. Language: Use the arrow buttons to select your desired language for the menus and messages, then press .

2. Projection Method: Select the installation orientation (e.g., [FRONT]/[FLOOR]), then press .

3. Auto Setup Start: Select [Execute] to automatically adjust the image based on the input signal, or [Skip] to adjust manually later. Press .

4. Keystone: If needed, select [Execute] to correct keystone distortion, or [Skip]. Press . If executing, use arrow buttons to adjust and to confirm.

5. Lens Control: Adjust Zoom, Focus, and Shift using the arrow buttons. Press when done.

6. Lens Calibration: Select [Execute] to perform lens calibration (recommended), or [Skip]. Press . Wait for calibration to complete.

7. Test Pattern: Select [Execute] to display a test pattern for fine adjustments, or [Skip]. Press .

8. Initial Setup End: Press to complete the initial setup.


How do I set the administrator account during initial setup?

If the administrator account setting screen appears after the initial setup:

1. Set administrator user name: Use the arrow buttons to select characters and to confirm each one. Select [End] and press when finished.

2. Set administrator password: Use the arrow buttons to select characters and to confirm. Select [End] and press .

3. Confirm administrator password: Re-enter the password using the same method. Select [End] and press .

4. Save administrator account: Select [Execute] and press to save the account information.


How do I navigate the on-screen menus?

1. Press the

button on the remote control or control panel to display the main menu.

2. Use the Up/Down arrow buttons to select a main menu item.

3. Press the button or the Right arrow button to display the sub-menu for the selected item.

4. Use the Up/Down arrow buttons to select a sub-menu item.

5. Press the button to display the setting options or adjustment bar for the selected item.

6. Use the arrow buttons to change the setting or adjust the level.

7. Press the button to confirm the setting/adjustment.

8. Press the

button to return to the previous menu level or exit the menu display.


How do I switch the projector off?

1. Press the button on the remote control or the control panel.

2. A confirmation message “[Power off?] Press button again.” will appear. Press the button again within 5 seconds.

3. The projector image will turn off, and the power indicator will blink red slowly as the cooling fan runs. Wait until the fan stops and the indicator lights solid red or orange.

4. If needed, set the

switch on the projector body to to cut off power completely.

Note: Do not turn the

switch off or unplug the power cord while the indicator is blinking red (cooling). Wait at least one minute after turning off before turning the projector back on.


How do I select the input signal to project?

You can select the input signal using either the direct input selection buttons or the input menu:

Using Input Selection Buttons:

Press the desired input button on the remote control (, , , , ) or the control panel (, , ). The projector will switch to the selected input.

Note: , , and / buttons require the corresponding optional Function Board to be installed.

Using the Input Menu:

1. Press the button on the remote control or control panel.

2. Use the arrow buttons to highlight the desired input source.

3. Press the button to select the highlighted input.


How do I adjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift?

Use the lens control buttons on the remote control or the button on the control panel:

1. Remote Control:

• Press the button, then use the Up/Down arrow buttons to adjust focus.

• Press the button, then use the Up/Down arrow buttons to adjust zoom (image size).

• Press the button, then use the Up/Down/Left/Right arrow buttons to shift the lens position vertically and horizontally.

2. Control Panel:

• Press the button repeatedly to cycle through Focus, Zoom, Vertical Shift, and Horizontal Shift adjustments.

• Use the arrow buttons (Up/Down for Focus/Zoom/Vertical Shift, Left/Right for Horizontal Shift) to make adjustments.

Press or wait a few seconds for the adjustment mode to finish.


How do I adjust the focus balance (for specific lenses)?

This adjustment is available for certain lenses (ET-D3LEW10, ET-D75LE10, ET-D3LES20, ET-D75LE20, ET-D3LET30, ET-D75LE30, ET-D3LET40, ET-D75LE40, ET-D3LEW60, ET-D75LE6, ET-D3LET80, ET-D75LE8) to improve focus uniformity across the screen.

1. Navigate to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS].

2. Display a test pattern (e.g., Crosshatch) using the button or menu.

3. Select [FOCUS BALANCE] in the [LENS] menu and press .

4. Use the arrow buttons to adjust the focus balance value until the center and peripheral areas of the screen are optimally focused. Press to confirm.


How do I confirm the lens type and perform lens calibration?

Confirming Lens Type:

Navigate to [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE]. The currently detected or set lens type will be displayed.

Executing Lens Calibration:

Lens calibration adjusts the lens shift range and home position. Perform this after attaching a lens or initializing settings.

1. Navigate to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS].

2. Select [LENS CALIBRATION] and press .

3. A confirmation message appears. Select [Execute] and press to start.

4. Wait for the calibration process to complete (approx. 1-2 minutes). Do not operate the projector during calibration.

Note: Calibration cannot be performed if no lens is attached, if certain errors occur, or during vertical projection.


How do I move the projection lens to the home position?

This moves the lens to the center of the shift range as determined by the last lens calibration.

1. Navigate to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS].

2. Select [LENS HOME POSITION] and press .

3. A confirmation message appears. Select [Execute] and press .

The lens will move to its calibrated home position.


How do I adjust the lens mounter if the focus is unbalanced (for specific lenses)?

This procedure applies if focus is unbalanced even after using Focus Balance (for lenses ET-D3LEW10/D75LE10, ET-D3LES20/D75LE20, ET-D3LET30/D75LE30, ET-D3LET40/D75LE40, ET-D3LEW60/D75LE6, ET-D3LET80/D75LE8).

1. Display a test pattern suitable for focus adjustment (e.g., Crosshatch).

2. Slightly loosen the four lens mounter fixing screws on the front of the projector body using a Phillips screwdriver.

3. Carefully push or pull the lens mounter slightly up, down, left, or right while observing the focus on the screen.

4. Once the focus is balanced across the screen, gently tighten the four fixing screws diagonally and alternately.

5. Re-check the focus. If necessary, readjust the main focus using the buttons.

6. Repeat steps 2-5 if the focus is still unbalanced.

Caution: Do not apply excessive force. Contact your dealer if adjustment is difficult.


How do I use a USB memory device with the projector?

USB memory can be used for the data cloning function and firmware updates.

Notes on use:

• Panasonic is not liable for data loss.

• Not all USB memory devices are guaranteed to work.

• Secure USB devices physically if needed.

• Use USB memory formatted with FAT32.

Attaching USB memory:

Insert the USB memory device into the terminal on the projector.

Removing USB memory:

Confirm that the data access has finished (access lamp, if any, is off) and then remove the USB memory device from the terminal.


How do I use the basic functions on the remote control?

Shutter Function: Press the button to temporarily blank the image. Press again to restore the image.

On-Screen Display (OSD): Press the button to toggle the display of menus and status information on/off.

Aspect Ratio: Press the button to cycle through available image aspect ratios.

Function Button: Press the button to execute a pre-assigned shortcut function. Hold the button down to access the assignment screen ([FUNCTION BUTTON] menu).

Test Patterns: Press the button to display built-in test patterns for adjustment. Press again to cycle through patterns or exit.

Status Function: Press the button to display projector information like input signal, lamp hours, etc.

Remote Backlight: Press the button to illuminate the remote control buttons for 10 seconds.


How do I perform maintenance on the projector?

Before Maintenance:

• Turn off the power using the button.

• Wait for the cooling fan to stop and the power indicator to turn red/orange.

• Turn off the

switch.

• Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.

Maintenance Procedures:

Projector Body: Gently wipe dirt with a soft, dry cloth. For heavy dirt, use a cloth dampened with water and mild detergent, then wipe dry. Avoid volatile solvents.

Projection Lens Surface: Gently wipe dirt with a clean, soft cloth (like those used for eyeglasses). Avoid scratching. Do not use liquids.

Inside Cleaning: Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector approximately every 20,000 hours of usage. Continuous use with accumulated dust may result in fire. Do not attempt to clean the inside yourself.


What should I do if the projector has problems?

Check the following potential problems and solutions:

Problem Check Items / Potential Solutions
Power
Projector does not turn on.
Is the power cord plugged in securely?
Is the
switch ON?
Is the power indicator lit or blinking? (Check indicator status table).
Check if the circuit breaker has tripped.
Image
No image is projected.
Is the lens cover attached?
Is the connecting cable connected correctly?
Is the correct input source selected?
Are Brightness/Contrast settings correct?
Is the shutter function activated ()?
Is the light output setting appropriate?
Image is out of focus. Adjust focus. Is the projection distance correct? Clean the lens surface. Perform lens calibration.
Colors are pale or unnatural. Adjust Color Temperature, Contrast, Brightness, Color settings. Check input signal source.
Image is distorted. Check [ASPECT] setting. Check [KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY] settings. Ensure projector is perpendicular to screen.
Lens
Lens shift/zoom/focus does not operate.
Is the lens attached correctly?
Has lens calibration been performed?
Remote Control
Remote control does not work.
Are batteries inserted correctly (+/-)?
Are batteries depleted?
Is there an obstacle between remote and projector’s sensor?
Is the correct ID number set (if using multiple projectors)? Is the LOCK switch engaged?
Indicators
TEMP or LIGHT indicator is lit/blinking.
Refer to the Light source/temperature indicators table for status and actions. May indicate overheating or light source issues.
Network
Cannot connect to network / control via network.
Is the LAN cable connected correctly?
Are network settings (IP address, etc.) correct on projector and control device? Check firewall settings.

If the problem persists after checking these items, unplug the projector and consult your dealer or an Authorized Service Center.


What do the error codes on the self-diagnosis display mean?

If an error occurs, an error code (Uxx or Exx) may be displayed on the screen or via the status indicators. Check the following common codes and remedies:

Error Code Status / Remedy
U32 Wireless module connection error. Check module installation.
U33 / U34 Function Board error. Check board installation. Turn power off/on.
U50 Emergency mode. Turn power off/on. If persists, contact dealer.
U61 / U63 / U64 / U73 Light source error. Turn power off/on. If persists, contact dealer.
U71 / U72 / U74 / U75 / U76 / U77 Internal temperature error. Check ventilation, ambient temperature. Clean vents. Wait for cooldown. Turn power off/on. If persists, contact dealer.
U82 Fan error. Check if fans are stopped. Turn power off/on. If persists, contact dealer.
Exx (various) Internal circuit error. Turn power off/on. If the same error code reappears, note the code and contact your dealer.

Note: This is not an exhaustive list. Refer to the self-diagnosis display section in the PDF for more details.


How do I connect the projector to a wired LAN?

1. Use a shielded LAN cable (STP/ScTP), Category 5e or higher, straight-through type.

2. Connect one end of the LAN cable to the terminal on the projector.

3. Connect the other end to your network hub, switch, or router.

4. Configure the network settings in the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] section of the projector menu (e.g., DHCP or static IP address).

Note: Ensure the network connection is made indoors.


How do I connect the projector to a wireless LAN?

This requires the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series).

1. Attach the Wireless Module to the projector’s terminal.

2. Navigate to the [NETWORK] menu → [WIRELESS LAN] → [NETWORK EASY SETTING] or [WIRELESS SETUP].

3. Choose a connection method:

[WPS (PUSH BUTTON)]: Press the WPS button on your wireless access point, then select this option on the projector and press .

[SEARCH FOR NETWORK]: Select this option, choose your network name (SSID) from the list, press , and enter the network password if required.

[MANUAL CONNECTION]: Select this option and manually enter the SSID, security type, and password.

4. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the connection.


How do I access and use the web control function?

You can control and monitor the projector from a computer connected to the same network using a web browser.

1. Ensure the projector is connected to the network (wired or wireless) and you know its IP address (check [NETWORK STATUS]).

2. Open a compatible web browser (e.g., Microsoft Edge, Google Chrome, Safari) on your computer.

3. Enter the projector’s IP address into the browser’s address bar and press Enter.

4. If prompted, enter the administrator username and password (set during initial setup or via menus).

5. The web control interface will load, allowing you to view status, control power, select inputs, adjust settings, and manage passwords.

The main sections are typically: [Status], [Projector control], [Detailed set up], [Set up password].


How do I use the data cloning function?

This function copies projector settings (excluding network settings, projector ID, lamp hours, etc.) to other projectors of the same model.

Copying data via LAN:

1. Connect the master and slave projector(s) to the same network.

2. On the master projector (source), navigate to [PROJECTOR SETUP] → [DATA CLONING] → [COPY VIA LAN].

3. Set [MASTER/SLAVE SETTING] to [MASTER].

4. On the slave projector(s) (destination), navigate to the same menu and set [MASTER/SLAVE SETTING] to [SLAVE].

5. On the master projector, select [EXECUTE COPY VIA LAN] and press . Select the IP address of the target slave projector and choose [Execute].

Copying data via USB memory:

1. Insert a FAT32 formatted USB memory device into the master projector.

2. On the master projector, navigate to [PROJECTOR SETUP] → [DATA CLONING] → [EXPORT TO USB].

3. Select [Execute] and press to save the settings data file (MODEL_SETTING_DATA.usr) to the USB.

4. Remove the USB device from the master projector and insert it into the slave projector.

5. On the slave projector, navigate to [PROJECTOR SETUP] → [DATA CLONING] → [IMPORT FROM USB].

6. Select [Execute] and press to load the settings from the USB device.

Note: The projector will restart after importing data.


How do I update the projector firmware using a USB memory device?

Preparation:

1. Download the latest firmware file for your projector model from the Panasonic website.

2. Format a USB memory device with the FAT32 file system.

3. Copy the downloaded firmware file (e.g., PANA_UPD.bin or similar) to the root directory of the USB memory device.

Update Procedure:

1. Turn on the projector’s

switch.

2. Insert the USB memory device containing the firmware file into the projector’s terminal.

3. Navigate to the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FIRMWARE UPDATE].

4. Select [UPDATE VIA USB] and press .

5. The projector will detect the firmware file. Verify the version information displayed.

6. Select [Execute] and press to start the update process.

7. Wait for the update to complete. Do not turn off the power or remove the USB device during the update. The projector may restart automatically.

8. Once the update is finished (indicated by an on-screen message or return to normal operation), remove the USB device.

9. Verify the firmware version in the [STATUS] menu if desired.


What precautions should be taken when attaching the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket?

• Installation must be performed by a qualified technician or dealer.

• Use only the specified Panasonic Ceiling Mount Bracket (ET-PKD520H/S + ET-PKD521B).

• Ensure the ceiling structure is strong enough to support the combined weight of the projector and bracket.

• Follow the installation instructions provided with the Ceiling Mount Bracket carefully.

• Always attach the supplied safety cable to prevent the projector from falling in case of unforeseen circumstances.

• Allow adequate ventilation space around the projector when installed.

• Periodically check that the mounting screws remain tight and secure.

• When mounting, ensure mounting screws and power cord do not contact metal parts inside the ceiling to avoid electric shock.


How is the projection distance determined for a 16:10 aspect ratio image?

The projection distance (L) for a 16:10 aspect ratio image depends on the projection lens model and the desired image size (Diagonal SD, Height SH, Width SW). Refer to the table below. A ±5% error in listed projection distances may occur. When [GEOMETRY] is used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specified image size. (Unit: m)

Projected image size
Diagonal (SD)
Height (SH) Width (SW) Zoom Lens – Projection distance (L)
ET-D3LEW200*1 ET-D3LEW60/ET-D75LE6 ET-D3LEW10 ET-D75LE10 ET-D3LES20/ET-D75LE20 ET-D3LET30
0.779-1.02:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.12-1.32:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.52-2.07:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.56-2.01:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
2.00-2.90:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
2.88-5.61:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.78 (70″)0.9421.508— —1.65 1.972.24 3.072.30 2.982.97 4.324.27 8.36
2.03 (80″)1.0771.723— —1.89 2.262.57 3.522.64 3.423.41 4.954.90 9.58
2.29 (90″)1.2121.939— —2.13 2.552.90 3.982.98 3.863.84 5.595.53 10.81
2.54 (100″)1.3462.154— —2.38 2.843.23 4.433.32 4.304.28 6.226.16 12.03
3.05 (120″)1.6152.585— —2.86 3.423.89 5.344.01 5.185.15 7.497.41 14.47
3.81 (150″)2.0193.231— —3.59 4.304.89 6.705.03 6.506.46 9.399.30 18.14
5.08 (200″)2.6924.3083.35 4.424.81 5.756.55 8.976.73 8.708.64 12.5612.44 24.25
6.35 (250″)3.3655.3854.22 5.556.02 7.218.21 11.238.44 10.9110.82 15.7315.58 30.35
7.62 (300″)4.0396.4625.08 6.687.24 8.679.87 13.5010.14 13.1113.00 18.9018.72 36.46
8.89 (350″)4.7127.5395.94 7.818.46 10.1211.53 15.7711.85 15.3115.18 22.0721.86 42.57
10.16 (400″)5.3858.6166.81 8.959.67 11.5813.19 18.0313.55 17.5217.37 25.2425.00 48.68
12.70 (500″)6.73110.7708.53 11.2112.10 14.4916.50 22.5716.96 21.9221.73 31.5831.28 60.90
15.24 (600″)8.07712.92310.26 13.4714.53 17.4119.82 27.1020.37 26.3326.09 37.9137.56 73.12
17.78 (700″)9.42315.077— —16.97 20.3223.14 31.6423.78 30.7430.45 44.2543.84 85.33
20.32 (800″)10.77017.231— —19.40 23.2426.46 36.1727.19 35.1434.81 50.5950.13 97.55
22.86 (900″)12.11619.385— —21.83 26.1529.78 40.7130.60 39.5539.18 56.9356.41 109.77
25.40 (1000″)13.46221.539— —24.26 29.0633.09 45.2434.01 43.9643.54 63.2762.69 121.99

Projected image size
Diagonal (SD)
Height (SH) Width (SW) Zoom Lens – Projection distance (L) Fixed-focus Lens
ET-D75LE30 ET-D3LET40 ET-D75LE40 ET-D3LET80/ET-D75LE8 ET-D3LEU100*1 ET-D3LEW50/ET-D75LE50
2.89-5.61:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
5.54-8.90:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
5.55-8.86:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
8.83-16.6:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
0.447:1
Fixed
0.838:1
Fixed
1.78 (70″)0.9421.5084.29 8.378.26 13.338.28 13.2913.10 24.901.22
2.03 (80″)1.0771.7234.92 9.599.47 15.269.48 15.2115.02 28.511.41
2.29 (90″)1.2121.9395.55 10.8110.67 17.1910.69 17.1316.95 32.121.59
2.54 (100″)1.3462.1546.18 12.0311.87 19.1211.89 19.0518.88 35.731.78
3.05 (120″)1.6152.5857.44 14.4714.28 22.9814.30 22.8922.73 42.952.15
3.81 (150″)2.0193.2319.33 18.1317.89 28.7717.92 28.6528.51 53.772.705
5.08 (200″)2.6924.30812.47 24.2323.91 38.4223.94 38.2638.14 71.821.923.63
6.35 (250″)3.3655.38515.62 30.3429.93 48.0729.97 47.8747.77 89.862.424.56
7.62 (300″)4.0396.46218.77 36.4435.95 57.7235.99 57.4757.40 107.912.925.48
8.89 (350″)4.7127.53921.91 42.5441.97 67.3842.02 67.0867.03 125.953.426.41
10.16 (400″)5.3858.61625.06 48.6447.99 77.0348.04 76.6876.66 143.993.917.33
12.70 (500″)6.73110.77031.35 60.8560.03 96.3360.09 95.8995.92 180.084.919.18
15.24 (600″)8.07712.92337.65 73.0572.08 115.6372.14 115.10115.18 216.175.9011.03
17.78 (700″)9.42315.07743.94 85.2684.12 134.9484.19 134.31134.44 —12.88
20.32 (800″)10.77017.23150.23 97.4696.16 154.2496.24 153.52153.70 —14.73
22.86 (900″)12.11619.38556.52 109.67108.20 173.54108.29 172.73172.97 —16.58
25.40 (1000″)13.46221.53962.82 121.87120.24 192.84120.34 191.94192.23 —18.43

*1: When the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEW200), the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEU100, ET-D75LE95), or the Fisheye Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEF70) is used, the projection relation between the screen and the projector differs from that of other lenses.

*2: The throw ratio is based on the value during projection with the projected image size of 3.81 m (150″).


How is the projection distance determined for a 16:9 aspect ratio image?

The projection distance (L) for a 16:9 aspect ratio image depends on the projection lens model and the desired image size. Refer to the table below. (Unit: m)

Projected image size
Diagonal (SD)
Height (SH) Width (SW) Zoom Lens – Projection distance (L)
ET-D3LEW200*1 ET-D3LEW60/ET-D75LE6 ET-D3LEW10 ET-D75LE10 ET-D3LES20/ET-D75LE20 ET-D3LET30
0.780-1.02:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.12-1.33:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.52-2.07:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.56-2.01:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
2.01-2.90:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
2.88-5.61:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.78 (70″)0.8721.550— —1.69 2.022.30 3.162.37 3.063.06 4.444.39 8.60
2.03 (80″)0.9961.771— —1.94 2.322.64 3.632.72 3.513.50 5.105.04 9.86
2.29 (90″)1.1211.992— —2.19 2.622.98 4.093.07 3.973.95 5.755.68 11.11
2.54 (100″)1.2452.214— —2.44 2.923.32 4.563.42 4.424.40 6.406.33 12.37
3.05 (120″)1.4942.657— —2.94 3.524.01 5.494.12 5.335.30 7.707.62 14.88
3.81 (150″)1.8683.321— —3.69 4.425.03 6.895.17 6.696.64 9.669.56 18.65
5.08 (200″)2.4914.4283.45 4.544.94 5.926.73 9.226.92 8.958.88 12.9112.79 24.93
6.35 (250″)3.1135.5354.34 5.716.19 7.418.44 11.558.67 11.2111.13 16.1716.01 31.20
7.62 (300″)3.7366.6415.22 6.877.44 8.9110.14 13.8810.43 13.4813.37 19.4319.24 37.48
8.89 (350″)4.3587.7486.11 8.038.69 10.4111.85 16.2112.18 15.7415.61 22.6822.47 43.76
10.16 (400″)4.9818.8557.00 9.209.94 11.9013.55 18.5413.93 18.0117.85 25.9425.70 50.04
12.70 (500″)6.22611.0698.77 11.5212.44 14.9016.96 23.2017.44 22.5422.33 32.4632.15 62.60
15.24 (600″)7.47213.28310.55 13.8514.94 17.8920.37 27.8620.94 27.0726.82 38.9738.61 75.15
17.78 (700″)8.71715.497— —17.44 20.8923.79 32.5224.44 31.6031.30 45.4945.07 87.71
20.32 (800″)9.96217.710— —19.94 23.8827.20 37.1827.95 36.1335.78 52.0051.52 100.27
22.86 (900″)11.20719.924— —22.44 26.8830.61 41.8431.45 40.6540.27 58.5157.98 112.83
25.40 (1000″)12.45322.138— —24.94 29.8734.02 46.5034.96 45.1844.75 65.0364.44 125.38

Projected image size
Diagonal (SD)
Height (SH) Width (SW) Zoom Lens – Projection distance (L) Fixed-focus Lens
ET-D75LE30 ET-D3LET40 ET-D75LE40 ET-D3LET80/ET-D75LE8 ET-D3LEU100*1 ET-D3LEW50/ET-D75LE50
2.89-5.61:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
5.54-8.90:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
5.55-8.87:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
8.83-16.6:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
0.447:1
Fixed
0.838:1
Fixed
1.78 (70″)0.8721.5504.41 8.608.50 13.708.51 13.6613.47 25.601.26
2.03 (80″)0.9961.7715.06 9.869.73 15.699.75 15.6315.45 29.311.45
2.29 (90″)1.1211.9925.71 11.1110.97 17.6710.99 17.6117.43 33.021.64
2.54 (100″)1.2452.2146.35 12.3712.21 19.6612.23 19.5819.41 36.731.83
3.05 (120″)1.4942.6577.65 14.8814.68 23.6214.70 23.5323.37 44.152.21
3.81 (150″)1.8683.3219.59 18.6418.40 29.5718.42 29.4629.31 55.282.78
5.08 (200″)2.4914.42812.82 24.9124.58 39.4924.61 39.3339.21 73.821.983.73
6.35 (250″)3.1135.53516.06 31.1830.77 49.4130.80 49.2049.11 92.372.494.68
7.62 (300″)3.7366.64119.29 37.4636.96 59.3337.00 59.0759.00 110.923.005.63
8.89 (350″)4.3587.74822.53 43.7343.15 69.2543.19 68.9568.90 129.463.516.59
10.16 (400″)4.9818.85525.76 50.0049.33 79.1749.38 78.8278.80 148.014.027.54
12.70 (500″)6.22611.06932.23 62.5461.71 99.0161.76 98.5698.60 185.105.059.44
15.24 (600″)7.47213.28338.70 75.0974.08 118.8574.15 118.31118.40 222.196.0711.34
17.78 (700″)8.71715.49745.16 87.6386.46 138.6986.53 138.05138.19 —13.24
20.32 (800″)9.96217.71051.63 100.1898.83 158.5398.92 157.80157.99 —15.15
22.86 (900″)11.20719.92458.10 112.72111.21 178.37111.30 177.54177.79 —17.05
25.40 (1000″)12.45322.13864.57 125.26123.58 198.21123.69 197.29197.58 —18.95

The table for ET-D75LE95*1 (Fixed-focus lens, Throw ratio 0.436:1) is as follows:

Diagonal (SD) Height (SH) Width (SW) Projection distance (L1) Distance from the projector to the screen (L4) Distance from the projector to the screen (A1)
1.78 (70″)0.8721.550
2.03 (80″)0.9961.771
2.29 (90″)1.1211.992
2.54 (100″)1.2452.214
3.05 (120″)1.4942.6571.160.300.33-0.69
3.81 (150″)1.8683.3211.440.580.44-0.89
5.08 (200″)2.4914.4281.921.060.62-1.22
6.35 (250″)3.1135.5352.391.530.80-1.55
7.62 (300″)3.7366.6412.872.010.99-1.88
8.89 (350″)4.3587.7483.342.481.17-2.21
10.16 (400″)4.9818.8553.822.961.35-2.55
12.70 (500″)6.22611.0694.773.911.72-3.21
15.24 (600″)7.47213.2835.724.862.08-3.88
17.78 (700″)8.71715.497
20.32 (800″)9.96217.710
22.86 (900″)11.20719.924
25.40 (1000″)12.45322.138

How is the projection distance determined for a 4:3 aspect ratio image?

The projection distance (L) for a 4:3 aspect ratio image depends on the projection lens model and the desired image size. Refer to the table below. (Unit: m)

Projected image size
Diagonal (SD)
Height (SH) Width (SW) Zoom Lens – Projection distance (L)
ET-D3LEW200*1 ET-D3LEW60/ET-D75LE6 ET-D3LEW10 ET-D75LE10 ET-D3LES20/ET-D75LE20 ET-D3LET30
0.938-1.23:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.34-1.59:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.83-2.49:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.88-2.41:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
2.41-3.49:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
3.46-6.74:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
1.78 (70″)1.0671.422— —1.87 2.242.54 3.492.62 3.383.37 4.914.85 9.49
2.03 (80″)1.2191.626— —2.15 2.572.92 4.003.00 3.883.87 5.625.56 10.88
2.29 (90″)1.3721.829— —2.42 2.893.29 4.523.39 4.384.36 6.346.27 12.26
2.54 (100″)1.5242.032— —2.70 3.223.67 5.033.77 4.884.86 7.066.99 13.64
3.05 (120″)1.8292.438— —3.25 3.884.42 6.064.55 5.885.84 8.498.41 16.41
3.81 (150″)2.2863.048— —4.07 4.875.55 7.605.70 7.377.32 10.6510.54 20.56
5.08 (200″)3.0484.0643.81 5.025.45 6.527.43 10.167.63 9.879.79 14.2314.10 27.47
6.35 (250″)3.8105.0804.79 6.306.83 8.179.30 12.739.56 12.3612.26 17.8217.65 34.39
7.62 (300″)4.5726.0965.76 7.588.20 9.8211.18 15.3011.49 14.8614.73 21.4121.21 41.30
8.89 (350″)5.3347.1126.74 8.869.58 11.4713.06 17.8613.42 17.3517.20 25.0024.76 48.22
10.16 (400″)6.0968.1287.72 10.1410.96 13.1214.94 20.4315.35 19.8519.67 28.5928.32 55.14
12.70 (500″)7.62010.1609.67 12.7013.71 16.4218.69 25.5619.21 24.8324.61 35.7635.43 68.97
15.24 (600″)9.14412.19211.63 15.2716.46 19.7222.45 30.7023.07 29.8229.55 42.9442.54 82.80
17.78 (700″)10.66814.224— —19.22 23.0226.21 35.8326.93 34.8134.48 50.1149.65 96.63
20.32 (800″)12.19216.256— —21.97 26.3129.96 40.9630.79 39.8039.42 57.2956.76 110.46
22.86 (900″)13.71618.288— —24.72 29.6133.72 46.1034.65 44.7944.36 64.4663.87 124.29
25.40 (1000″)15.24020.320— —27.47 32.9137.48 51.2338.51 49.7849.30 71.6470.99 138.12

Projected image size
Diagonal (SD)
Height (SH) Width (SW) Zoom Lens – Projection distance (L) Fixed-focus Lens
ET-D75LE30 ET-D3LET40 ET-D75LE40 ET-D3LET80/ET-D75LE8 ET-D3LEU100*1 ET-D3LEW50/ET-D75LE50
3.47-6.74:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
6.66-10.6:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
6.67-10.6:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
10.7-19.9:1
Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
0.538:1
Fixed
1.01:1
Fixed
1.78 (70″)1.0671.4224.87 9.509.37 15.119.39 15.0614.88 28.241.40
2.03 (80″)1.2191.6265.59 10.8810.74 17.3010.76 17.2417.06 32.321.60
2.29 (90″)1.3721.8296.30 12.2612.10 19.4812.12 19.4119.24 36.411.81
2.54 (100″)1.5242.0327.01 13.6413.46 21.6713.48 21.5921.42 40.502.02
3.05 (120″)1.8292.4388.44 16.4016.19 26.0416.21 25.9425.78 48.672.44
3.81 (150″)2.2863.04810.57 20.5520.28 32.5920.30 32.4632.32 60.923.07
5.08 (200″)3.0484.06414.14 27.4627.09 43.5227.12 43.3343.22 81.352.194.12
6.35 (250″)3.8105.08017.70 34.3633.91 54.4533.94 54.2154.13 101.782.755.17
7.62 (300″)4.5726.09621.26 41.2740.72 65.3740.76 65.0865.03 122.213.316.21
8.89 (350″)5.3347.11224.82 48.1847.54 76.3047.59 75.9675.93 142.633.887.26
10.16 (400″)6.0968.12828.38 55.0954.36 87.2354.41 86.8386.84 163.064.448.31
12.70 (500″)7.62010.16035.51 68.9167.99 109.0868.05 108.58108.64 203.915.5610.40
15.24 (600″)9.14412.19242.63 82.7281.62 130.9381.69 130.33130.45 244.776.6912.50
17.78 (700″)10.66814.22449.76 96.5495.25 152.7895.33 152.07152.25 —14.59
20.32 (800″)12.19216.25656.88 110.36108.88 174.63108.97 173.82174.06 —16.69
22.86 (900″)13.71618.28864.01 124.17122.51 196.49122.61 195.57195.86 —18.78
25.40 (1000″)15.24020.32071.13 137.99136.14 218.34136.25 217.32217.67 —20.88

The table for ET-D75LE95*1 (Fixed-focus lens, Throw ratio 0.522:1) is as follows:

Diagonal (SD) Height (SH) Width (SW) Projection distance (L1) Distance from the projector to the screen (L4) Distance from the projector to the screen (A1)
1.78 (70″)1.0671.422
2.03 (80″)1.2191.626
2.29 (90″)1.3721.829
2.54 (100″)1.5242.032
3.05 (120″)1.8292.4381.280.410.28-0.68
3.81 (150″)2.2863.0481.590.730.38-0.87
5.08 (200″)3.0484.0642.111.250.54-1.20
6.35 (250″)3.8105.0802.641.770.71-1.53
7.62 (300″)4.5726.0963.162.300.87-1.86
8.89 (350″)5.3347.1123.682.821.03-2.18
10.16 (400″)6.0968.1284.203.341.20-2.51
12.70 (500″)7.62010.1605.254.391.52-3.17
15.24 (600″)9.14412.1926.305.431.85-3.82
17.78 (700″)10.66814.224
20.32 (800″)12.19216.256
22.86 (900″)13.71618.288
25.40 (1000″)15.24020.320

How can I calculate the projection distance if my image size is not listed?

To calculate the projection distance for an unlisted projected image size SD (m), use the respective formula below. The unit of all formulae is m. Values obtained may contain a slight error. If using image size in inches, multiply by 0.0254 to convert to SD (m) before using the formula.

Zoom Lens Projection distance (L) formula:

Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio Min. (LW) Max. (LT)
ET-D3LEW2000.779-1.02:116:10= 0.6798 x SD – 0.1001= 0.8910 x SD – 0.1076
0.780-1.02:116:9= 0.6987 x SD – 0.1001= 0.9158 x SD – 0.1076
0.938-1.23:14:3= 0.7696 x SD – 0.1001= 1.0087 x SD – 0.1076
ET-D3LEW60/ET-D75LE61.12-1.32:116:10= 0.9574 x SD – 0.0566= 1.1471 x SD – 0.0736
1.12-1.33:116:9= 0.9841 x SD – 0.0566= 1.1790 x SD – 0.0736
1.34-1.59:14:3= 1.0839 x SD – 0.0566= 1.2986 x SD – 0.0736
ET-D3LEW101.52-2.07:116:10= 1.3063 x SD – 0.0867= 1.7852 x SD – 0.1025
1.52-2.07:116:9= 1.3426 x SD – 0.0867= 1.8348 x SD – 0.1025
1.83-2.49:14:3= 1.4788 x SD – 0.0867= 2.0209 x SD – 0.1025
ET-D75LE101.56-2.01:116:10= 1.3423 x SD – 0.0857= 1.7349 x SD – 0.1085
1.56-2.01:116:9= 1.3796 x SD – 0.0857= 1.7831 x SD – 0.1085
1.88-2.41:14:3= 1.5196 x SD – 0.0857= 1.9641 x SD – 0.1085
ET-D3LES20/ET-D75LE202.00-2.90:116:10= 1.7174 x SD – 0.0832= 2.4954 x SD – 0.1162
2.01-2.90:116:9= 1.7651 x SD – 0.0832= 2.5648 x SD – 0.1162
2.41-3.49:14:3= 1.9442 x SD – 0.0832= 2.8250 x SD – 0.1162
ET-D3LET302.88-5.61:116:10= 2.4730 x SD – 0.1261= 4.8101 x SD – 0.1892
2.88-5.61:116:9= 2.5418 x SD – 0.1261= 4.9438 x SD – 0.1892
3.46-6.74:14:3= 2.7997 x SD – 0.1261= 5.4454 x SD – 0.1892
ET-D75LE302.89-5.61:116:10= 2.4776 x SD – 0.1131= 4.8050 x SD – 0.1765
2.89-5.61:116:9= 2.5465 x SD – 0.1131= 4.9386 x SD – 0.1765
3.47-6.74:14:3= 2.8048 x SD – 0.1131= 5.4396 x SD – 0.1765
ET-D3LET405.54-8.90:116:10= 4.7403 x SD – 0.1673= 7.5996 x SD – 0.1846
5.54-8.90:116:9= 4.8721 x SD – 0.1673= 7.8109 x SD – 0.1846
6.66-10.6:14:3= 5.3664 x SD – 0.1673= 8.6033 x SD – 0.1846
ET-D75LE405.55-8.86:116:10= 4.7439 x SD – 0.1577= 7.5632 x SD – 0.1615
5.55-8.87:116:9= 4.8758 x SD – 0.1577= 7.7735 x SD – 0.1615
6.67-10.6:14:3= 5.3704 x SD – 0.1577= 8.5622 x SD – 0.1615
ET-D3LET80/ET-D75LE88.83-16.6:116:10= 7.5832 x SD – 0.3862= 14.2081 x SD – 0.3598
8.83-16.6:116:9= 7.7940 x SD – 0.3862= 14.6031 x SD – 0.3598
10.7-19.9:14:3= 8.5848 x SD – 0.3862= 16.0846 x SD – 0.3598

Fixed-focus Lens Projection distance (L) formula:

Projection lens Model No. Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L) formula
ET-D3LEU1000.447:116:10= 0.3917 x SD – 0.0664
0.447:116:9= 0.4025 x SD – 0.0664
0.538:14:3= 0.4434 x SD – 0.0664
ET-D3LEW50/ET-D75LE500.838:116:10= 0.7286 x SD – 0.0713
0.838:116:9= 0.7488 x SD – 0.0713
1.01:14:3= 0.8248 x SD – 0.0713

ET-D75LE95 Fixed-focus Lens Projection distance (L1) and Distance (A1) formula from the projector to the screen:

Throw ratio Aspect ratio Projection distance (L1) formula Distance (A1) formula Min. Distance (A1) formula Max.
0.436:116:10= 0.364 x SD + 0.020= 0.214 x SH – 0.110= 0.430 x SH – 0.110
0.436:116:9= 0.374 x SD + 0.020= 0.293 x SH – 0.110= 0.533 x SH – 0.110
0.522:14:3= 0.412 x SD + 0.020= 0.214 x SH – 0.110= 0.430 x SH – 0.110

How do I adjust the adjustable feet of the projector?

Install the projector on a flat surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the projection screen is rectangular.

If the screen is tilted downward, extend the front adjustable feet so that the projected image becomes rectangular.

The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the horizontal direction.

Adjustable feet can be extended by turning them as shown in the figure (clockwise when viewed from top). Turning them in the opposite direction will return them to the original position.

The maximum adjustable range for each foot is 20 mm (25/32″).

Attention: Be careful not to block the intake/exhaust vents with your hands or any objects when adjusting the adjustable feet while the light source is on.

Note: The adjustable feet to be adjusted may differ depending on the used projection lens. Adjust the adjustable feet while viewing the image.


What precautions should be taken before attaching or removing the projection lens?

Always move the projection lens to the home position before replacing or removing it.

Attention:

• Replace the projection lens after turning off the power of the projector.

• Do not touch the electric contacts of the projection lens. Dust or dirt may cause poor contact.

• Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.

• Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens.

• Do not touch any area other than specified in “Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus is unbalanced” with the projection lens removed. Touching around the projection lens mount inside the projector may result in malfunction.

• Do not attach the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE5 (production discontinued)) to the projector. Attaching by mistake will cause malfunction of the projector.

• Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. takes no responsibility for any damage or malfunction of the product resulting from the use of projection lenses which are not manufactured by Panasonic Connect Co., Ltd. Be sure to use the specified projection lenses.

Note:

• The precautions for handling the lens are different for the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE95). For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of ET-D75LE95.

• When using the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEW200) or the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEU100), it is recommended to use together with the Lens Fixed Attachment (Model No.: ET-PLF20).

• When using the Fisheye Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEF70), it is recommended to use together with the Lens Fixed Attachment (Model No.: ET-PLF10).

• For the adjustment procedure of the focus, zoom, and lens shift after attaching the projector lens, refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and lens shift”.

• For the adjustment procedure of the focus balance in the center and periphery of the projected image when specific projection lenses are used, refer to “Adjusting the focus balance”.

• For the adjustment procedure of the focus balance between top, bottom, left, and right of the projected image, refer to “Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus is unbalanced”.


How do I attach the projection lens?

Start from Step 3) if the lens hole cover is already removed.

1) Loosen the screw fixing the lens hole cover. (Fig. 1)

• Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the screw fixing the lens hole cover counterclockwise until it turns freely.

2) Remove the lens hole cover. (Fig. 2)

• While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens hole cover counterclockwise until the mark on the lens hole cover aligns with the mark on the projector (on the left side of LOCK).

3) Insert the projection lens by aligning the mark on the projection lens (orange) with the mark on the projector (on the left side of LOCK) and turn clockwise until it clicks. (Fig. 3)

4) Secure the projection lens with the supplied lens fixing screw. (Fig. 4)

• Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure it in screw hole A located to the right of mark on the projection lens (orange).

• Some projection lenses may not have a screw hole A for securing the projection lens.

Attention:

• Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to confirm that it does not come out.

• Store the removed lens hole cover in a safe place.

• After attaching the projection lens, turn on the projector and confirm the [LENS TYPE] setting. Change the setting if the type is different from the projection lens attached to the projector.

• When the Zoom Lens with the stepping motor unit is used, confirm the [LENS TYPE] setting, and then execute the lens calibration.


How do I remove the projection lens?

1) Remove the lens fixing screw.

• Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the first screw to the right of the mark on the projection lens (orange).

2) Remove the projection lens by turning it counterclockwise while pressing the lens release button. (Fig. 1)

• Turn the projection lens counterclockwise until the mark on the projection lens (orange) is aligned with the mark on the projector (on the left side of LOCK).

• Proceed to Step 3) when carrying or storing the projector.

3) Attach the supplied lens hole cover. (Fig. 2)

• Insert the lens hole cover by aligning the mark on the lens hole cover with the mark on the projector (on the left side of LOCK) and turn clockwise until it clicks.

4) Secure the lens hole cover. (Fig. 3)

• Use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screw fixing the lens hole cover.

Note: Some projection lenses may not have a screw hole for securing the projection lens.

Attention:

• Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact.

• Store the removed lens fixing screw in a safe place.


What should be considered before installing or removing the Function Board?

• Always turn off the power of the projector before installing or removing the Function Board. Always follow the procedure of “Switching off the projector” when turning off the power.

• Do not touch the connector section of the Function Board directly with your hands. The component may be damaged by static electricity.

• Remove static electricity from your body by touching surrounding metal, etc., in advance to prevent static electricity damage.

• Take care not to get injured when installing or removing the Function Board. Hands may be injured by the opening of the blank slot or the edge of the bracket of the Function Board.

• When installing the Function Board to the slot, insert it into the connector straight and slowly. It may not operate or cause malfunction if it is not correctly installed.

• Confirm that there is no lead wires or installed parts that may obstruct installation to the slot in the area within approximately 3 mm (1/8″) from the end face of the circuit board of the Function Board (sections A and B). The Function Board cannot be installed correctly due to interference with the slot guide rail or the SLOT adapter guide.

• When attaching the SLOT adapter, confirm that there is no circuitry within the area approximately 3 mm (1/8″) from the end face of the circuit board in the SLOT adapter side (section B). If there is circuitry, secure insulation with the SLOT adapter guide (clasp) by affixing a masking tape, etc.

Requesting a qualified technician to install or remove the Function Board is recommended. A malfunction may occur due to static electricity. Consult your dealer.


How do I install an Intel® SDM-S specification Function Board?

Attach the supplied SLOT adapter in advance when installing a narrow width Intel® SDM Small (Intel® SDM-S) specification Function Board.

1) Remove one screw from the SLOT adapter. (Fig. 1)

• Remove the screw at the side with the guide of the bracket on the SLOT adapter by rotating counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver.

2) Attach the Function Board to the SLOT adapter. (Fig. 2)

• Insert and firmly push in the Function Board circuit board into the guide on the SLOT adapter.

• Confirm that the Function Board circuit board is in contact with the tip of the hook and the end faces (two locations) of the SLOT adapter.

3) Fix the Function Board. (Fig. 3)

• Securely tighten and fix the Function Board with the screw removed in Step 1).

• Confirm that the Function Board circuit board is pressed against the hook of the SLOT adapter.

Note: Function Board cannot be correctly installed in the slot unless the Function Board circuit board and the SLOT adapter circuit board are parallel in the same plane.


How do I install the Function Board in the projector?

1) Remove the slot cover. (Fig. 1)

• Remove the two screws fixing the slot cover by rotating counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver. The removed screws are used to fix the Function Board.

• When removing the second screw, hold the slot cover with your hand so it will not fall.

• To replace from another Function Board, remove the Function Board following the procedure in “Removing the Function Board”.

2) Install the Function Board in the projector. (Fig. 2)

• Insert the Function Board along the groove of the guide rail at both sides inside the slot. Insert the bracket firmly all the way in.

3) Fix the Function Board. (Fig. 3)

• Tighten and fix the Function Board with the two screws removed in Step 1).

Attention: The removed slot cover is required when the projector is used with the Function Board removed. Store it so that it can be attached in the future.


How do I remove the Function Board?

1) Remove the Function Board. (Fig. 1)

• Remove the two screws fixing the Function Board by rotating counterclockwise with a Phillips screwdriver. The removed screws are used to fix the slot cover.

• Hold the handles of the Function Board and remove it slowly.

2) Attach the slot cover.

• Attach the stored slot cover, and tighten and fix with the two screws removed in Step 1).

• To replace with another Function Board, install the Function Board following the procedure in “Installing the Function Board”.

Attention:

• Always attach the slot cover on the blank slot.

• Store the removed Function Board inside an antistatic bag.


What should be done before connecting cables to the projector?

• Before connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.

• Turn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.

• Connect cables taking care of the following descriptions. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions.

– When connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself, touch any nearby metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work.

– Do not use unnecessarily long cables to connect a device to the projector or to the projector body. The longer the cable, the more susceptible to noise it becomes. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.

– When connecting cables, connect GND first, then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a straight manner.

• Acquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied with the device nor available as an option.

• To use the Function Board, install it in the slot in advance. Requesting a qualified technician to install the Function Board in the slot or remove from the slot is recommended. A malfunction may occur due to static electricity. Consult your dealer.

• For the connection when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in the slot, refer to “For //// terminals of the Function Board”.

• For the connection when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot, refer to “Connecting example using DIGITAL LINK”.

• When the projector is used with the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) or an interface board or module by other manufacturers installed in the slot, refer to the respective Operating Instructions.

• For the connection when linking multiple projectors and using the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function”.

• Some computer models or graphic cards are not compatible with the projector.

• If connecting the projector to a computer that uses an early-type chipset or graphics card compatible with DisplayPort, the projector or computer may not be operated properly when the signal output from DisplayPort on the computer is input to the projector. In such a case, switch off the projector or computer and then switch it on. If the signal output from DisplayPort is input to the projector, use of the computer equipped with the latest chipset or graphics card is recommended.

• Connect using an extension device, etc., when installing the projector away from the video equipment. The projector may not display the image properly when it is connected directly using a long cable.

• For details of the types of image signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals”.


How do I connect AV equipment using HDMI terminals?

Connect your AV equipment (e.g., Blu-ray disc player) to the or terminal on the projector using an HDMI cable.

Note:

• When HDMI signal is input, switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [HDMI1]/[HDMI2] → [EDID SELECT] may be required depending on the connected external device or the input signal.

• For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to the HDMI standards. However, when a 4K image signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI High Speed cable is to be input, use an HDMI cable supporting the high speed transmission of 18 Gbps such as one with Premium HDMI cable authentication. An image signal with high specification color depth and gradation such as 3840 x 2160/60p 4:2:2/36-bit or 3840 x 2160/60p 4:4:4/24-bit Images may be disrupted or may not be projected when an image signal exceeding the supported transmission speed of the HDMI cable is input.

• The / terminals of the projector can be connected to an external device equipped with a DVI-D terminal using an HDMI/DVI conversion cable. However, this may not function properly for some external devices, and image may not be projected.

• The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI) and HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control).


How do I connect AV equipment using SDI terminals on the Function Board?

This example applies when the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in .

Connect your 12G-SDI signal output compatible device to the , , , or terminals using an appropriate SDI cable. The terminal can be used to pass through the signal from .

Note:

• Use a cable of 5C-FB or higher (such as 5C-FB or 7C-FB) to properly transmit images when transmitting the HD-SDI signal or the 3G-SDI signal. It is recommended to use a cable of L-5.5CUHD manufactured by Canare Electric Co., Ltd. when transmitting the 12G-SDI signal.

• The maximum cable length that can be used is as follows (rough guideline, does not guarantee transmission distance):

– Input and output of HD-SDI signal and 3G-SDI signal: 100 m (328’1″)

– Input of 12G-SDI signal: 80 m (262’6″) (when using a cable of L-5.5CUHD), 20 m (65’7″) (when using a cable of 5C-FB)

– Output of 12G-SDI signal: 50 m (164’1″) (when using a cable of L-5.5CUHD), 20 m (65’7″) (when using a cable of 5C-FB)

• Use the BNC connector that is compatible with the coaxial cable and type of the signal to be used.

• Setting the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] is required depending on the connected external device or the input signal.

• The terminal is an active through terminal to output the SDI signal (HD-SDI/3G-SDI/12G-SDI) input to the terminal.

• The // terminals are used when the quad link signal is input. These terminals do not support input of 12G-SDI signal.

• To input the quad link signal, use the cable with same length and same type for connecting to each of /// terminals. The image may not be projected correctly when the difference of the cable length is 4 m (13’1″) or more.

• Directly connect the projector with the external device that will output the signal without going through a distributor, etc., when inputting quad link signals. A phase difference is generated between the signals of Link 1, Link 2, Link 3, and Link 4, and the image may not be projected correctly.

• An error in signal detection may occur when an unsteady signal is input to the projector. In such case, set the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] to the content corresponding to the input signal.


How do I connect computers to the projector?

Computers can be connected using HDMI or DisplayPort cables to the respective / or terminals on the projector.

A control computer can be connected via a LAN cable to the terminal for network control.

Attention: When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially available shielded cables.

Note:

• When HDMI signal is input, switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [HDMI1]/[HDMI2] → [EDID SELECT] may be required.

• For the HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable. For 4K signals exceeding HDMI High Speed cable capacity, use a Premium HDMI certified cable. Images may be disrupted if an unsuitable cable is used.

• HDMI inputs can be connected to DVI-D terminals using an HDMI/DVI conversion cable, but functionality may vary.

• When DisplayPort signal is input, switching of the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DisplayPort IN] → [EDID SELECT] may be required.

• For the DisplayPort cable, use a DisplayPort certified cable. Images may be interrupted if a non-conforming cable is used.

• If you operate the projector using a computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate the projector.


How do I connect devices using DIGITAL LINK with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter?

This applies when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in .

A twisted-pair-cable transmitter (e.g., ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) based on HDBaseT™ standard uses a twisted pair cable to transmit input images, Ethernet, and serial control signals. The projector can receive these signals via the terminal.

Connect the DIGITAL LINK output of the transmitter to the terminal of the projector using a CAT5e or higher shielded twisted-pair cable.

Video sources (e.g., computer, Blu-ray player, VCR) connect to the inputs of the twisted-pair-cable transmitter. A control computer can be connected to a switching hub, which is then connected to the transmitter, or directly to the transmitter if it supports control.

Attention:

• Always use a VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC) or use a TBC between the projector and VCR. Nonstandard burst signals may disrupt the image.

• Ask a qualified technician for cable wiring. Image disruption may occur due to inadequate installation.

• Use a CAT5e or higher shielded, straight-through, single-wire cable with core diameter AWG24 or larger.

• Verify cable characteristics using a cable tester/analyzer.

• Do not use a hub between the transmitter and projector.

• When using a transmitter from other manufacturers, do not place another transmitter between it and the projector.

• To transmit Ethernet and serial control signals via , set [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].

• To transmit Ethernet via the standard terminal, set [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [LAN] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK].

• The and standard terminals are internally connected when [ETHERNET TYPE] is [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Do not directly connect them with a LAN cable. Ensure they are not on the same network via peripherals.

• Do not pull, bend, or fold cables unnecessarily. Lay cables away from other cables, especially power cables, and run multiple cables side by side over the shortest distance.

• After laying cables, check [NETWORK] menu → [DIGITAL LINK] → [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] for [SIGNAL QUALITY] (should be green).

Note:

• Max transmission distance is 100 m (328’1″) for 1920×1200 or less, and 50 m (164’1″) for signals exceeding 1920×1200. Up to 150 m (492’2″) is possible with long-reach transmitters for signals up to 1080/60p. Exceeding these may cause disruptions.


How do I link multiple display devices using DIGITAL LINK?

The terminal on the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board outputs the DIGITAL LINK signal (including audio) that was input to the terminal.

By connecting multiple display devices supporting DIGITAL LINK in a daisy chain, you can transmit image, audio, and serial control signals with a twisted pair cable.

Connect the of one projector to the of the next projector in the chain.

Note:

• To transmit Ethernet and serial control signals, set [NETWORK] menu → [ETHERNET TYPE] to [DIGITAL LINK] or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK]. Only the first display device receives Ethernet.

• DIGITAL LINK signal is output only when a compatible display device is connected to .

• Up to 10 devices can be daisy-chained. Image quality may degrade depending on devices/cables.

• Max 8 devices for HDCP 1.X protected signals.

• Max 5 devices for HDCP 2.X protected signals.

• In standby mode, signal input to is not output from .


How do I use the contrast synchronization function with multiple projectors?

To display a linked screen with balanced contrast, share the brightness level of the image signal among projectors.

For each linked projector, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] as follows:

1. Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF].

2. Set [MODE] to [MAIN] only on one projector that is linked. Set [MODE] to [SUB] for all other projectors.

3. Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [CONTRAST SYNC] to [ON].

Unify the [CONTRAST MODE] setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] for each linked projector to [1] or [2]. If any projector lacks this menu, unify to [1].


How do I use the shutter synchronization function with multiple projectors?

This synchronizes the shutter operation (including fade in/out) of a specified projector to others.

For each linked projector, set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] as follows:

1. Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [MODE] to anything other than [OFF].

2. Set [MODE] to [MAIN] only on one projector (the synchronization source). Set [MODE] to [SUB] for all others.

3. Set [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] → [SHUTTER SYNC] to [ON].

Unify the [CONTRAST MODE] setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] for each linked projector to [1] or [2]. If any projector lacks this menu, unify to [1].


How do I connect projectors for contrast/shutter synchronization?

Connect all projectors in a loop by daisy chain connection using the and terminals. The maximum number of linked projectors is 64.

Connect the of the first (MAIN) projector to the of the next. Continue this chain, and connect the of the last projector to the of the first (MAIN) projector to complete the loop.

Note:

• Contrast and shutter synchronization can be used simultaneously.

• Menu items for [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] are also found under [PICTURE] → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] and [DISPLAY OPTION] → [SHUTTER SETTING].

• If some projectors in the link should not synchronize, set their [CONTRAST SYNC] and [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] individually.

• Shutter synchronization operates even with different models, but not if a DLP projector with one DLP chip (e.g., PT-RCQ10 series) is in the link.


How do I attach the power cord to the projector?

Ensure the

switch is before connecting.

1) Confirm that the power cord holder is raised so that the power cord can be inserted. (Fig. 1)

2) Check the shapes of the terminal on the side of the projector and the power cord connector, then insert the connector completely in the correct direction. (Fig. 2)

3) Lower the power cord holder. (Fig. 3)

4) Press down the power cord holder until the end of the power cord holder snaps onto the power cord to secure the power cord. (Fig. 4)

• When pressing down and snapping the power cord holder onto the power cord, hold the power cord from the opposite side to avoid excessive force to be applied on the terminal.

Note:

• Maximum light output is limited to 15,000 lm or less with AC 100V-120V. It’s further decreased if a Function Board is installed, or if the light source deteriorates or has dust.

• Supplied power cords vary by region.


How do I remove the power cord?

1) Confirm that the

switch on the side of the projector is on the side, and remove the power plug from the outlet.

2) Raise the power cord holder fixing the power cord upward. (Fig. 1)

• Fix the power cord holder by snapping into the projector.

3) While holding the power cord connector, pull out the power cord from the terminal of the projector. (Fig. 2)


What do the different states of the Power indicator mean?

Indicator status Projector status
Off The main power is switched off.
Red (On) The power is switched off. (standby mode) Projection will start when the button is pressed. The projector may not operate if or indicators are blinking.
Red (Blinking) The output image corresponding to the projected image from the projector is being checked by the web control function.
Green (On) Projecting.
Orange (On) The projector is preparing to switch off the projector. The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.)

Note:

• While the indicator is orange, the fan is cooling the projector.

• The projector consumes power in standby mode (indicator red). Refer to “Standby mode power consumption” for details.

• When receiving a signal from the remote, the indicator blinks: Green if projecting, Orange if in standby (but may stay red if [STANDBY MODE] is [ECO]).

• The indicator blinks slowly in green during shutter function (closed) or when [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] is active.


How do I switch on the projector?

Install the projection lens and remove the lens cover first.

1) Connect the power cord to the projector.

2) Connect the power plug to an outlet.

3) Press the side of the

switch to turn on the power.

• The power indicator lights in red, and the projector enters standby mode.

4) Press the button (on projector or remote).

• The power indicator lights in green and the image is soon projected.

Attention: Always remove the lens cover before projection to prevent fire hazards.

Note:

• Warm-up up to 5 mins may be needed at around 0°C (32°F); indicator lights. If warm-up exceeds 5 mins due to low temp, projector goes to standby. Increase temp and try again.

• Startup is longer if [STANDBY MODE] is [ECO].

• If power was cut during previous use (e.g., by main switch or breaker), projector starts directly if [INITIAL STARTUP] is [LAST MEMORY].

• Max light output is limited with AC 100V-120V, and further reduced if Function Board is installed or light source/optics are degraded/dusty.


How do I adjust focus during initial setup?

When the projector is switched on for the first time or after a factory reset, the focus adjustment screen appears.

1) Press ▲▼ to adjust the focus until the menu screen is clear.

You may also need to adjust zoom and lens shift.

2) Press the

button to proceed to the initial setting.


How do I set the display language during initial setup?

After focus adjustment, the [INITIAL SETTING] screen for display language appears.

1) Press ▲▼ to select the display language (e.g., ENGLISH, DEUTSCH, FRANÇAIS, etc.).

2) Press the button to proceed to the next initial setting.

After initial setup, language can be changed from the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu.


How do I configure the initial operation settings (Operating Mode and Light Output)?

This setting appears after display language selection during initial setup.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [OPERATING MODE].

2) Press ◄► to switch the item. Options are:

[NORMAL]: For high luminance. Estimated runtime approx. 20,000 hours or more*1.

[ECO]: Brightness decreases vs [NORMAL]; prioritizes light source life. Estimated runtime approx. 24,000 hours or more*1.

[QUIET]: Brightness decreases vs [NORMAL]; prioritizes low noise operation. Estimated runtime approx. 20,000 hours or more*1.

[USER1], [USER2], [USER3]: Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] as desired.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].

4) Press ◄► to adjust. Pressing ► increases brightness (shorter runtime), ◄ decreases brightness (longer runtime). Range: 8.0% – 100.0%*1.

5) Press the button to proceed to the initial setting.

*1 Estimated runtime is until brightness is approx. half of delivery, with [PICTURE] → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] at [3], under 0.15 mg/m³ dust. This is an estimate, not a warranty. The upper limit for light output adjustment depends on [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] setting.


What is the relationship between [LIGHT OUTPUT] percentage, brightness, and estimated runtime for PT-RQ25K/PT-RZ24K models?

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%) Brightness (lm) Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0 %20 00029 100
90.0 %18 00031 600
80.0 %16 00034 500
70.0 %14 00038 100
60.0 %12 00042 400
50.0 %10 00047 800

*1 Estimated runtime until brightness is approx. half of delivery, with [PICTURE] → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] at [3], under 0.15 mg/m³ dust. This is an estimate, not a warranty.


What is the relationship between [LIGHT OUTPUT] percentage, brightness, and estimated runtime for PT-RQ18K/PT-RZ17K models?

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%) Brightness (lm) Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0 %16 00039 300
90.0 %14 40042 200
80.0 %12 80045 700
70.0 %11 20049 700
60.0 %9 60054 500
50.0 %8 00060 200

*1 Estimated runtime until brightness is approx. half of delivery, with [PICTURE] → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] at [3], under 0.15 mg/m³ dust. This is an estimate, not a warranty.

Note: Runtime may be shorter due to light source characteristics, usage, environment. If consolidated runtime exceeds 20,000 hours, component replacement may be needed (check [STATUS] screen). Wider combination of luminance/runtime is available via [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [CONSTANT MODE] to [AUTO] or [PC].


How do I set the projection method (installation setting) during initial setup?

This setting appears after operation settings during initial setup. Set [FRONT/REAR] and [FLOOR/CEILING] in [PROJECTION METHOD] based on installation.

1) Press ◄► to switch the setting for [FRONT/REAR] or [FLOOR/CEILING]. The active item will change selection.

(e.g., FRONT/REAR: FRONT, FLOOR/CEILING: AUTO)

Change if the screen display is upside down or inverted.

2) Press the button to proceed to the initial setting.

After initial setup, this can be changed from [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD].


How do I set the standby mode during initial setup?

This setting appears after installation settings during initial setup. Factory default is [NORMAL] (allows network function in standby). Set to [ECO] for lower power consumption in standby.

1) Press ◄► to switch the [STANDBY MODE] between [NORMAL] and [ECO].

When set to ECO, network functions, SERIAL OUT, DC OUT, and some RS-232C commands are unavailable during standby.

2) Press the button to proceed to the initial setting.

After initial setup, this can be changed from [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE].


How do I set the screen format and position during initial setup?

This setting appears after standby mode settings during initial setup.

1) Press ◄► to switch the [SCREEN FORMAT] (aspect ratio, e.g., 16:10, 16:9).

The setting will change each time you press the button.

2) Press ▲▼ to select [SCREEN POSITION].

[SCREEN POSITION] cannot be selected or adjusted if [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10].

3) Press ◄► to adjust the [SCREEN POSITION] if applicable.

4) Press the button to proceed to the initial setting.

After initial setup, these can be changed from [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN SETTING].


How do I set the time zone during initial setup?

This setting appears after screen settings during initial setup. Set [TIME ZONE] according to your region.

1) Press ◄► to switch the [TIME ZONE] (e.g., +09:00).

Current [LOCAL DATE] and [LOCAL TIME] will update based on selection.

2) Press the button to proceed to the initial setting.

Note: Factory default is +09:00 (Japan/Korea). Change this via [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] after initial setup if needed.


How do I set the date and time during initial setup?

This setting appears after time zone settings during initial setup.

1) Press ▲▼ to select an item (YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND).

2) Press ◄► to switch the setting for the selected item.

3) Repeat for all items.

4) Press the button. This confirms the setting value and completes the initial setting for date and time.

After initial setup, these can be changed from [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME]. To set automatically, refer to “Setting the date and time automatically”.


What is the password policy for the administrator account?

The password policy is as follows:

• Reusing passwords is not recommended.

• Password cannot be blank.

• A password consisting of at least eight half-width characters and containing characters of at least three of the following four types is recommended:

– Uppercase letters

– Lowercase letters

– Digits

– Symbols (~!@#$%^&*()_+\|}{][<>.,/?`)

This policy is displayed by selecting [PASSWORD POLICY] on the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen.


How do I set up the administrator account (user name and password)?

This screen appears after initial settings if it’s the first time or after a factory/network reset.

1) To view the password policy, press ▲▼ to select [PASSWORD POLICY], and press . Press

to return.

2) Press ▲▼ to select [USER NAME], and press . The [USER NAME] screen appears. Factory default is “dispadmin”.

3) On the [USER NAME] screen, use ▲▼◄► to select characters and to input them. Up to 16 characters.

4) After entering the user name, select [OK] and press . The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen reappears.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [PASSWORD], and press . The [PASSWORD] screen appears.

6) On the [PASSWORD] screen, use ▲▼◄► to select characters and to input them. Up to 16 characters. Cannot be blank.

7) After entering the password, select [OK] and press . The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen reappears.

8) Press ▲▼ to select [PASSWORD CONFIRM], and press . The [PASSWORD] screen appears.

9) Enter the same password as in Step 6).

10) After confirming the password, select [OK] and press . The [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen reappears.

11) Press ▲▼ to select [STORE], and press . A confirmation screen appears.

12) Press ◄► to select [OK], and press to save the administrator account settings.

Note: Pressing

on the [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] screen bypasses password setup, disabling network functions. The screen won’t appear on next startup. Setup later via [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]. User/password can also be changed via web control.


How do I make image adjustments and input selections after initial setup?

Once the projected image has stabilized:

• For ET-D3LEW200 or ET-D3LEU100 lens: Adjust image after at least one hour with focus test pattern.

• For other lenses: Adjust image after at least 30 minutes with focus test pattern.

• To use active focus optimizer: Set [PROJECTOR SETUP] → [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [ACTIVE FOCUS] to [ON], then adjust focus.

1) Press the button (projector/remote) to roughly adjust focus.

2) Change [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] according to installation mode if needed.

3) Confirm [LENS TYPE] in [PROJECTOR SETUP] → [LENS] menu, especially after first attaching a lens.

4) Execute lens calibration ([PROJECTOR SETUP] → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION]), especially for Zoom Lens with stepping motor for the first time.

5) Select input using input selection buttons on remote (, , , , ) or control panel (, , ).

6) Adjust front, back, and sideways tilt with adjustable feet.

7) Press button (remote) to adjust projected image position.

8) Press button (remote) to match image size to screen.

9) Press button (remote) again to fine-tune focus.

10) Press button (remote) again to adjust zoom and match image size.


How do I switch off the projector?

1) Press the button (on projector or remote).

• The [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] confirmation screen is displayed.

2) Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the button. (Or press the button again.)

• Projection stops. Power indicator on projector lights orange (fan runs).

3) Wait a few seconds until the power indicator lights/blinks red.

4) Press the side of the

switch to turn off the power.

Attention: Follow this procedure to avoid damaging internal components.

Note: Projector consumes power if main power is on, even in standby. Usage of some functions is restricted but power consumption during standby is conserved when [STANDBY MODE] is [ECO].


How do I select the input signal directly using the remote control buttons?

1) Press the desired input selection button on the remote control:

: Switches to HDMI. Selects or . Pressing again switches to the other if one is already selected.

: Switches to DisplayPort. Projects image from .

: Switches to SDI. Operable when optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (TY-SB01QS) is installed.

: Switches to DIGITAL LINK. Operable when optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (TY-SB01DL) is installed.

: Switches to SDI, DIGITAL LINK, PressIT, or SLOT. Displays image from the Function Board in .

Attention: Images may not project properly depending on external device/disc. Adjust [PICTURE] → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] or [DISPLAY OPTION] → [SLOT IN]. Confirm aspect ratio via [POSITION] → [ASPECT].

Note: For optional DIGITAL LINK devices (ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G), pressing changes input on that device. For other transmitters, switch projector to DIGITAL LINK, then switch input on transmitter. Button operation can be fixed via [SECURITY] → [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]. Input cannot be changed in standby mode.


How do I select the input signal directly using the control panel buttons?

1) Press the input selection button on the control panel:

: Switches to HDMI. Selects or . Pressing again switches to the other if one is already selected.

: Switches to DisplayPort. Projects image from .

: Switches to SDI, DIGITAL LINK, PressIT, or SLOT. Displays image from the Function Board installed in the slot.

Attention: Similar to remote control, adjust system/slot settings if needed. Confirm aspect ratio.

Note: Button operation can be fixed via [SECURITY] → [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]. Input cannot be changed in standby mode.


How do I select the input signal by displaying the input selection screen?

1) Press the button on the remote control or control panel.

• The input selection screen appears (e.g., showing HDMI1, HDMI2, DisplayPort, DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]).

2) To cycle through inputs, press the button again. The input will switch each time.

Alternatively, while the input selection screen is displayed, press ▲▼ to select the input and then press to confirm.

Note: If an optional DIGITAL LINK output device is connected, selecting DIGITAL LINK and pressing may show its input selection menu. The display for [SLOT] input varies depending on the installed Function Board (e.g., [SDI [SLOT]], [DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]], [PressIT [SLOT]]).


How do I adjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift using the control panel?

1) Press the button on the control panel.

• Pressing the button changes the adjustment screen in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].

2) Select each item (focus, zoom, or shift direction) and press ▲▼ to adjust it.


How do I adjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift using the remote control?

1) Press the lens buttons (, , ) on the remote control.

button: Adjusts lens focus position.

button: Adjusts lens zoom position.

button: Adjusts lens shift (vertical and horizontal position).

2) Select each item (focus, zoom, or shift direction) and press ▲▼◄► to adjust it.

CAUTION: During lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in any opening around the lens to avoid injury.

Note: Zoom adjustment screen isn’t displayed for lenses without zoom. For Fixed-focus Lens (ET-D3LEW50, ET-D75LE50), do not adjust lens shift; use lens in home position. Adjustment is faster if buttons held down. Perform adjustments after image stabilizes. If power off during adjustment, perform LENS CALIBRATION after power on.


How do I adjust the focus balance for Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEW10, ET-D3LEW60, ET-D75LE6) and Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEW50, ET-D75LE50)?

This adjustment is for when the focus balance in the center and periphery of the image is lost after changing image size. The illustration uses ET-D3LEW10 as an example.

1) Adjust the focus at the center of the projected image using standard focus controls.

2) Loosen the lock screw on the lens.

3) Turn the periphery focus adjustment ring by hand to adjust the focus in the periphery of the screen.

4) Check the focus at the center of the image again and make fine adjustments.

5) Tighten the lock screw. The periphery focus adjustment ring is now fixed.

Note: When using for the first time or after lens replacement, confirm [LENS TYPE] and execute [LENS CALIBRATION]. The image size on the ring is an adjustment direction guide, not supported image size.


How do I adjust the focus balance for Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEW200) and Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEU100)?

The illustration uses ET-D3LEU100 as an example.

1) Turn the periphery focus adjustment ring towards the direction of the arrow by hand and align to the actual projection distance from the projection lens surface to the screen (as displayed on the lens ring).

2) Adjust the focus at the center of the projected image using standard focus controls.

Note: Confirm [LENS TYPE] and execute [LENS CALIBRATION] if new lens/first use. Projection distance on lens is an approximate guide.


How do I adjust the focus balance for Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE95)?

Adjust focus with the projector correctly installed against the screen.

1) Move the projection lens to the home position.

2) Adjust the focus at the center of the projected image using standard focus controls.

3) Loosen the lock screw on the lens.

4) Turn the periphery focus adjustment ring by hand to adjust the focus in the periphery of the screen.

5) Check the focus at the center of the image again and make fine adjustments.

6) Tighten the lock screw. The periphery focus adjustment ring is fixed.

Note: Confirm [LENS TYPE] and execute [LENS CALIBRATION] if new lens/first use. Image size/scale on ring is an approximate guide.


How do I adjust the focus balance for Fisheye Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEF70)?

1) Adjust the focus at the center of the projected image using standard focus controls.

2) Loosen the lock screw on the lens.

3) Turn the periphery focus adjustment ring by hand to adjust the focus in the periphery of the screen.

4) Check the focus at the center of the image again and make fine adjustments.

5) Tighten the lock screw. The periphery focus adjustment ring is fixed.

Note: Confirm [LENS TYPE] and execute [LENS CALIBRATION] if new lens/first use. Projection distance (THROW.DISTANCE) on ring is an approximate guide.


How do I confirm or change the lens type setting?

When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, confirm the [LENS TYPE] setting. Change it if different from the attached lens.

1) Press the

button. The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

2) Press ▲▼ to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].

3) Press the button. The [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

5) Press the button. The [LENS] screen is displayed, showing current [LENS TYPE].

6) If changing, press ▲▼ to select [LENS TYPE].

7) Press the button. The [LENS TYPE] screen is displayed.

8) Press ▲▼ to select the type of projection lens attached to the projector.

9) Press the button.


How do I execute lens calibration for a Zoom Lens with a stepping motor?

This applies when a standard DC motor unit in a Zoom Lens (e.g., ET-D75LE6) is replaced with a stepping motor kit (ET-D75MKS10), or when a Zoom Lens with stepping motor (e.g., ET-D3LEW60) is attached. Always execute zoom calibration especially after attaching these lenses.

1) Press

to display [MAIN MENU].

2) Select [PROJECTOR SETUP] and press .

3) Select [LENS] and press .

4) Select [LENS CALIBRATION] and press .

5) The [LENS CALIBRATION] screen is displayed. Press ▲▼ to select an item:

[SHIFT/FOCUS/ZOOM]: Calibrates lens shift, focus, and zoom. Lens moves to home position after.

[SHIFT/FOCUS]: Calibrates lens shift and focus. Lens moves to home position after.

[ZOOM]: Calibrates zoom adjustment range.

6) Press . A confirmation screen appears.

7) Select [OK] and press . Calibration starts.

Note: Pressing (remote) for 3+ sec. also shows confirmation for [SHIFT/FOCUS/ZOOM]. Pressing (remote) for 3+ sec. shows confirmation for [ZOOM]. Cannot execute if [LENS TYPE] is [NOT SELECTED]. Home position varies by lens type.


How do I execute lens calibration for a Zoom Lens with a DC motor or a Fixed-focus Lens?

This applies to Zoom Lenses (e.g., ET-D75LE6) with original DC motor, or Fixed-focus Lenses (e.g., ET-D3LEW50, ET-D75LE95) without zoom.

1) Press

to display [MAIN MENU].

2) Select [PROJECTOR SETUP] and press .

3) Select [LENS] and press .

4) Select [LENS CALIBRATION] and press .

5) A confirmation screen is displayed.

6) Press ◄► to select [OK], and press .

• Lens calibration starts. For Zoom Lens, shift, focus, and zoom are calibrated. For Fixed-focus Lens, shift and focus are calibrated.

• After completion, the projection lens moves to the home position.

Note: Pressing (remote) for 3+ sec. also shows confirmation. Cannot execute if [LENS TYPE] is [NOT SELECTED]. Home position varies by lens type.


How do I move the projection lens to the home position using the main menu?

1) Press the

button. The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

2) Press ▲▼ to select [PROJECTOR SETUP].

3) Press the button. The [PROJECTOR SETUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

5) Press the button. The [LENS] screen is displayed.

6) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS HOME POSITION].

7) Press the button. A confirmation screen is displayed.

8) Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the button.

• The projection lens is moved to the home position. [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu.

Note: [HOME POSITION] screen also by pressing (control panel) or (remote) for 3+ sec. Cannot execute if [LENS TYPE] is [NOT SELECTED] or incorrect. Home position varies by lens type and does not match optical image center. ET-D75LE95 home position may deviate from designed.


How do I move the projection lens to the home position from the lens shift adjustment screen?

1) Press the button on the remote control while displaying the lens shift adjustment screen.

• A confirmation screen is displayed.

2) Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the button.

• [PROGRESS] is displayed in the [HOME POSITION] screen, and the projection lens is moved to the origin position.

Note: Similar notes as for main menu method apply regarding display, [LENS TYPE], and home position variation.


What is the lens shift range for different projection lenses?

The projector can adjust the projected image position within a specific lens shift range for each lens, based on the optical center (standard projection position). Perform lens shift within this illustrated range. Moving outside it may change focus as shift is restricted to protect optical parts. The illustrations generally show the range when installed on a desk/floor.

ET-D3LEW10, ET-D3LES20, ET-D3LET30, ET-D3LET40, ET-D3LET80, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20, ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40, ET-D75LE8:

Vertical shift: ±0.66 V (where V is projected image height)

Horizontal shift: ±0.24 H (where H is projected image width)

ET-D3LEW60, ET-D75LE6:

Vertical shift: ±0.52 V

Horizontal shift: ±0.18 H

ET-D3LEW200:

Vertical shift: ±0.57 V

Horizontal shift: ±0.18 H

ET-D3LEU100:

Vertical shift: +0.66 V / -0.66 V from optical axis, total range varies within this.

Horizontal shift: ±0.14 H from optical axis. (Part of the image may be lacking at extremes of vertical shift combined with horizontal)

Vertical shift from standard projection position: +0.22V / -0.22V.

Horizontal shift from standard projection position: +0.25H / -0.30H.

ET-D75LE95:

Vertical shift: +0.16 V / -0.06 V (total 0.77V possible shift range, actual usable area might be +0.06V from optical center or -0.06V from optical center depending on context)

Horizontal shift: ±0.14 H

ET-D3LEF70 (Fisheye Lens):

Vertical shift: ±0.32 V

Horizontal shift: ±0.14 H (Note: illustration does not represent actual movement of projected image)

Note: For ET-D3LEW50, ET-D75LE50, use in standard position without lens shift.


What is the relationship between the tilt of the lens and the screen focus surface?

When the projection lens is tilted in contrast with the image forming surface, tilting the front side (screen side) of the projection lens downwards will cause the upper side of the screen focus surface to tilt inwards and the lower side to tilt outwards.


How do I adjust the focus balance by tilting the lens mounter?

If the entire screen surface focus is not uniform even after standard focus adjustment, the lens mounter’s focus adjustment screws (three locations: a, b, c) can be used. A hex driver or Allen wrench (diagonal 4.0 mm (5/32″)) is needed. The Allen wrench supplied with ET-D75LE6 or ET-D75LE8 cannot be used.

The lens mounter has focus adjustment screws (a), (b), (c) that move the lens mount bracket back and forth. Tightening fixed screws locks the bracket. This adjustment is for when a heavy lens is installed or projector is on an incline, causing lens tilt and unbalanced focus.


What is the relationship between the adjustment location on screen and the lens mounter adjustment screws for focus balance?

If the just focus point of the screen is in the inner side of the screen at a specific location, you need to adjust the corresponding screw(s) counterclockwise:

If just focus point is inner at: Adjust screw(s) counterclockwise:
V up (top in vertical direction)(a)
V bottom (bottom in vertical direction)(b) + (c)
H left (left in horizontal direction)(b)
H right (right in horizontal direction)(c)

What is the procedure for adjusting the lens mounter screws for focus balance?

1) Press (remote) or (control panel) to display the focus adjustment screen.

2) Press ▼ to shift the focus of the entire screen once (towards inner).

3) Press ▲ to stop on any part of the screen to be the first just focus point. (This location now has its just focus point on the inner side of the screen).

4) Loosen the fixed screws (up to one and a half rotations) in the position relative to where focus is most shifted inwards from Step 2. Turn screws clockwise in two locations, or at least one.

5) Slowly turn the corresponding focus adjustment screws counterclockwise (refer to the relationship table) and stop where the image is in focus. Turning counterclockwise moves the lens bracket forward (screen side), and on screen, the focus point in the opposite direction of the screws moves from inner to outer.

6) Press (remote) or (control panel) for lens shift adjustment, and reset screen position to optimal.

7) Perform focus adjustment again near screen center. If still not enough, fine-tune adjustment screw rotation.

8) When adjustments are made, securely tighten the loosened fixing screws.

9) Adjust focus again using the remote control.


What should be noted when using a USB memory with the projector?

• Do not disassemble or modify the USB memory.

• Do not apply strong impact.

• Do not pour liquid on it or get it wet.

• Do not place foreign objects into the terminal.

• Do not touch the metal terminal with hand or metal.

• Avoid high humidity or dust.

• Avoid static electricity or electromagnetic radiation.

• Store appropriately, away from small children.

• If smoke/odor noticed, remove immediately and contact manufacturer.

• Do not remove while reading or writing data.

This projector supports USB memory for user test patterns, data cloning, firmware updates, etc.


What type of USB memory can be used with the projector?

The projector supports commercially available USB 2.0 compatible USB memory formatted in FAT16 or FAT32.

Only the single partition structure is supported.


How do I attach a USB memory?

1) Insert the USB memory all the way into the terminal.

Attention:

• Take care of orientation to avoid damage.

• Do not use a USB extension cable or hub; insert directly.

• Do not insert into the terminal; it’s not for USB memory.

Note: USB memory can be attached even when projector is on.


How do I remove a USB memory?

1) Remove the USB memory after confirming that the indicator on the USB memory is not blinking.

Attention:

• Blinking indicator means data access. Do not remove.

• If USB has no indicator, confirm access status by:

– Turning off projector.

– For test pattern registration: Confirm [USER TEST PATTERN] screen displayed after save.

– For data cloning: Confirm save/load complete in menu.

– For firmware update: Wait for projector to auto standby after update.


How do I use the shutter function with the remote control?

To temporarily turn off the image, for example, during a meeting intermission:

1) Press the button on the remote control (or control panel).

• The image disappears.

2) Press the button again.

• The image is displayed.

Note: Power indicator blinks slowly green while shutter is active. Settings for mechanical shutter use and fade time are in [DISPLAY OPTION] → [SHUTTER SETTING]. If [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is [DISABLE], light source may be dimly lit due to warm-up at around 0°C (32°F).


How do I use the on-screen display (OSD) hide/show function with the remote control?

To hide on-screen displays like the menu or input terminal name:

1) Press the button on the remote control.

• Turns off (hides) the on-screen display.

2) Press the button again.

• Cancels the hide condition, showing the on-screen display.

Note: Hide condition can also be canceled by pressing

(control panel) for at least 3 seconds while OSD is hidden.


How do I switch the display position of the menu screen (OSD) using the remote control?

1) Press and hold the button on the remote control for at least one second.

• The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed with the cursor in [OSD POSITION] state.

2) Press ◄► to switch the [OSD POSITION] setting.

• The OSD position will switch each time you press ◄►.

Note: OSD position can also be changed via menu operation in [DISPLAY OPTION] → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD POSITION].


How do I switch the image aspect ratio using the remote control?

1) Press the button on the remote control.

• The setting will change each time you press the button, cycling through available aspect ratios.

Note: Aspect ratio can also be switched via [POSITION] menu → [ASPECT].


How do I use the button on the remote control?

The button can be assigned as a shortcut to one of the following functions: [SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM SELECTOR], [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW], [FREEZE], [WAVEFORM MONITOR], [LENS MEMORY LOAD], [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] (PT-RZ24K and PT-RZ17K only), [PROJECTION METHOD], [GEOMETRY].

1) Press the button to activate the assigned function.

Note: Function assignment is done from [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON]. Holding down also displays the assignment screen.


How do I display test patterns using the remote control?

Ten internal test patterns and up to three user-registered patterns can be displayed.

1) Press the button.

• The current test pattern and main menu screen are displayed. If [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) is displayed, proceed to Step 3).

2) Press the button again.

• The test pattern and [TEST PATTERN] screen (list format) are displayed. (This screen also appears by selecting [TEST PATTERN] in main menu and pressing ).

3) Press ▲▼ to select the test pattern to display, and press .

• Selected pattern and [TEST PATTERN] screen (toggle selection format) are displayed.

4) Press ◄► to switch the test pattern. Each press switches the pattern.

Note: Screens can be hidden with button. Test patterns also via menu. Position/size settings don’t affect test patterns; adjust with input image.


How do I use the status function with the remote control?

1) Press the button on the remote control.

• The [STATUS] screen is displayed, showing information like Projector Type, Serial Number, Runtimes, Firmware Version, Temperatures, Self Test results.

Note: Projector status also via [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS].


How do I set the ID number for the remote control to operate specific projectors?

Assign a unique ID to each projector to operate them individually or all at once with a single remote.

First, set the ID number on the projector (factory default is [ALL]). Then set the same ID on the remote.

1) Press the button on the remote control.

2) Within five seconds, press the number buttons (<0> – <9>) on the remote to set the one-digit or two-digit ID number matching the projector’s ID.

• If you press the button instead, the remote controls projectors regardless of their ID settings (same as ID [0]).

Attention: Remote ID can be set without projector. If is pressed and no number within 5 sec, ID reverts. Remote ID stored unless set again or batteries die (then re-set).

Note: Remote ID [0] controls all projectors. Set projector ID from [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].


How do I navigate the on-screen menu?

Follow this operating procedure:

1) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.

• The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

2) Press ▲▼ to select an item from the main menu.

• The selected item is highlighted in yellow.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select a sub-menu, and press ◄► or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings.

• Some items will switch in order as follows each time you press ◄►: A → B → C

• For some items, press ◄► to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.

CONTRAST

◄► ADJUST 0

Note:

• Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.

• Some items or functions may not be adjusted or used depending on the signals input to the projector. When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set. If the item in the menu screen is displayed in black characters and the item cannot be adjusted or set, the factor causing it is displayed by pressing the <ENTER> button while the corresponding menu is selected.

• Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.

• Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds.

• For menu items, refer to “Main menu” and “Sub-menu” sections in the manual.

• The cursor color depends on the setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD COLOR]. The selected item is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.

• In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways. To display the on-screen menu vertically, change the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD ROTATION].


How do I reset adjustment values to the factory default?

If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to the factory default settings.

1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

Note:

• You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.

• To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu item to the factory default one at a time, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE].

• Some items cannot be reset to the factory default settings even when the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed. Adjust those items individually.

• The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular mark varies according to the selected input signals.


What are the main menu items and which are available in SIMPLE mode?

When a main menu item is selected, the screen changes to a sub-menu selection screen. The menu item with ✓ in the [SIMPLE] mode column indicates that this is displayed in the menu screen (OSD) when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [MENU MODE] is set to [SIMPLE].

Main menu item [SIMPLE] mode Page
[PICTURE] 108
[POSITION] 118
[ADVANCED MENU] 126
[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] 133
[3D SETTINGS]*1 134
[DISPLAY OPTION] 139
[PROJECTOR SETUP] 165
[TEST PATTERN] 209
[SIGNAL LIST] 212
[SECURITY] 215
[NETWORK] 219

*1 PT-RZ24K and PT-RZ17K only


What are the sub-menu items for [PICTURE] and their factory defaults?

The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the sub-menu. The menu item with ✓ in the [SIMPLE] mode column indicates that this is displayed in the menu screen (OSD) when the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [MENU MODE] is set to [SIMPLE].

[PICTURE]

Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page
[PICTURE MODE] [STANDARD]*1 108
[CONTRAST] [0] 108
[BRIGHTNESS] [0] 109
[COLOR] [0]*2 109
[TINT] [0] 109
[COLOR TEMPERATURE] [DEFAULT]*2 109
[GAMMA] [DEFAULT]*2 111
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] [OFF]*2 113
[SHARPNESS] [+8]*2 113
[NOISE REDUCTION] [2]*2 113
[DYNAMIC CONTRAST] [2]*2 113
[COLOR SPACE] [NATIVE]*2 116
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] [AUTO]*1 116

*1 Depends on the signal input.

*2 Depends on the [PICTURE MODE].


What are the sub-menu items for [POSITION] and their factory defaults?

[POSITION]

Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page
[SHIFT] 118
[ASPECT] [DEFAULT] 118
[ZOOM] 119
[GEOMETRY] [OFF] 120
[CONVERGENCE] [OFF] 125

What are the sub-menu items for [ADVANCED MENU] and their factory defaults?

[ADVANCED MENU]

Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page
[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] [AUTO]*1 126
[GRADATION SMOOTHER] [2] 126
[BLANKING] 126
[EDGE BLENDING] [OFF] 127
[FRAME RESPONSE] [NORMAL] 131
[FRAME DELAY] [+0.00ms] 131
[FRAME LOCK]*2 [ON] 132
[QUAD PIXEL DRIVE]*3 [ON] 132
[RASTER POSITION] 132

*1 Depends on the signal input.

*2 PT-RZ24K and PT-RZ17K only

*3 PT-RQ25K and PT-RQ18K only


What are the sub-menu items for [3D SETTINGS] (PT-RZ24K and PT-RZ17K only) and their factory defaults?

[3D SETTINGS] (PT-RZ24K and PT-RZ17K only)

Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page
[3D SYSTEM SETTING] [SINGLE] 134
[3D SYNC SETTING] 134
[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING] 135
[3D INPUT FORMAT] [AUTO]*1 135
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] [NORMAL] 136
[3D COLOR MATCHING] [SHARED 2D/3D] 136
[DARK TIME SETTING] [1.5ms] 136
[3D TEST MODE] [NORMAL] 137
[3D TEST PATTERN] 137
[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE] [ON] 137
[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] 138

*1 Varies depending on the selected input terminal.


What are the sub-menu items for [DISPLAY OPTION] and their factory defaults?

[DISPLAY OPTION]

Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page
[COLOR MATCHING] [OFF] 139
[SCREEN SETTING] 141
[BACKUP INPUT SETTING] 142
[HDMI IN] 143
[DisplayPort IN] 146
[SLOT IN] 148
[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] 156
[MENU MODE] [NORMAL] 158
[BACK COLOR] [BLUE] 158
[STARTUP LOGO] [DEFAULT LOGO] 159
[UNIFORMITY] 159
[SHUTTER SETTING] 160
[FREEZE] 163
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] [OFF] 163
[CUT OFF] 164

What are the sub-menu items for [PROJECTOR SETUP] and their factory defaults?

[PROJECTOR SETUP]

Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page
[PROJECTOR ID] [ALL] 165
[PROJECTION METHOD] 165
[LENS] 166
[SLOT SETTING] 178
[OPERATION SETTING] 179
[LIGHT OUTPUT] [100.0%] 183
[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] 183
[STANDBY MODE] [NORMAL] 188
[POWER MANAGEMENT] 188
[NO SIGNAL SETTING] 189
[INITIAL STARTUP] [LAST MEMORY] 192
[STARTUP INPUT SELECT] [LAST USED] 192
[DATE AND TIME] 193
[SCHEDULE] [OFF] 194
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] 196
[RS-232C] 198
[REMOTE2 MODE] [DEFAULT] 199
[FUNCTION BUTTON] 200
[STATUS] 200
[INFO MONITOR SETTING] 204
[DATA CLONING] 205
[SAVE ALL USER DATA] 205
[LOAD ALL USER DATA] 206
[INITIALIZE] 206
[FIRMWARE UPDATE] 208
[SAVE LOG] 208
[SERVICE PASSWORD] 208

What are the sub-menu items for [SECURITY] and their factory defaults?

[SECURITY]

Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page
[SECURITY PASSWORD] [OFF] 215
[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] 215
[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] 215
[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 218

What are the sub-menu items for [NETWORK] and their factory defaults?

[NETWORK]

Sub-menu item Factory default [SIMPLE] mode Page
[ETHERNET TYPE]*1 [LAN] 219
[DIGITAL LINK]*1 219
[WIRED LAN] 221
[WIRELESS LAN]*2 [ENABLE] 222
[PROJECTOR NAME] 223
[NETWORK STATUS] 223
[NFC SETTING] [READ/WRITE] 224
[ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT] 225
[NETWORK SECURITY] 227
[NETWORK CONTROL] 228
[PJLink] 228
[Art-Net] 230

*1 [ETHERNET TYPE] and [DIGITAL LINK] cannot be set if the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is not installed in the slot.

*2 [WIRELESS LAN] cannot be set if the optional Wireless Module (Model No.: AJ-WM50 Series) is not attached to the <USB> terminal.

Note:

• Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector. When the items cannot be adjusted or used, the items in the menu screen are shown in black characters, and they cannot be adjusted or set.

• Sub-menu items and factory default settings vary depending on the selected input terminal.

• The [NETWORK] menu → [NFC SETTING] is displayed when the NFC function is enabled. The optional NFC Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-NUK10) can be used to enable the NFC function of the projector. Note that there are some models that have the NFC function enabled from the time of factory shipment, and there are some countries or regions where the NFC Upgrade Kit cannot be applied. For the availability of the NFC function in the country or region where you purchased the product, visit the website https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/ or consult your dealer.


How do I switch the picture mode?

You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the projector is used.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [PICTURE MODE].

2) Press ◄►.

• The [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Picture Mode Description
[STANDARD] The image becomes suitable for video signals in general.
[CINEMA] The image becomes suitable for movie contents.
[NATURAL] The image is sRGB compliant.
[DICOM SIM.] The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.
[DYNAMIC] The image becomes suitable for use in bright areas.
[GRAPHIC] The image becomes suitable for computer signal input.
[USER] Set any desired picture mode.

Note:

• The factory default picture mode is [GRAPHIC] for computer signal input and [STANDARD] for video signal input.

• DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images.

• Press the <ENTER> button when each [PICTURE MODE] is selected to save as a specified value when a new signal is input. The data of all items except [SYSTEM SELECTOR] in the [PICTURE] menu is saved.

• In the factory default settings, [USER] is set to images that comply with the ITU-R BT.709 standard.


How do I change the [USER] picture mode name?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [PICTURE MODE].

2) Press ◄► to select [USER].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [PICTURE MODE] detailed screen is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE], and press the <ENTER> button.

• The [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼◄► to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

6) Press ▲▼◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• The picture mode name is changed.


How do I adjust the contrast?

You can adjust the contrast of the colors.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [CONTRAST].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to adjust the level.

Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press ► The screen becomes brighter. -31 – +31
Press ◄ The screen becomes darker.

How do I adjust the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the projected image?

Attention: Adjust the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS] first when you need to adjust the black level.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [BRIGHTNESS].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to adjust the level.

Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press ► Increases the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen. -31 – +31
Press ◄ Reduces the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.

How do I adjust the color saturation of the projected image?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [COLOR].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to adjust the level.

Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press ► Deepens colors. -31 – +31
Press ◄ Weakens colors.

How do I adjust the skin tone in the projected image?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [TINT].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to adjust the level.

Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press ► Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color. -31 – +31
Press ◄ Adjusts skin tone toward reddish purple.

How do I adjust the color temperature?

You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.

Adjusting with color temperature:

1) Press ▲▼ to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

2) Press ◄►.

• The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Item Description
[DEFAULT] Factory default setting.
[USER1] Adjusts white balance as desired. Refer to “Adjusting desired white balance” for details.
[USER2]
[3200K] – [13000K] Allows you to set in increments of 100 K. Select so that images become natural.

Note:

• [DEFAULT] cannot be selected when the [PICTURE] menu → [PICTURE MODE] is set to [USER] or [DICOM SIM.].

• When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [COLOR MATCHING] is set to anything other than [OFF], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to [USER1].

• The color temperature numerical values are guidelines.


How do I adjust the desired white balance for [USER1] or [USER2] color temperature settings?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

2) Press ◄►.

• The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to select [USER1] or [USER2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [WHITE BALANCE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.

9) Press ▲▼ to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

10) Press ◄► to adjust the level.

Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
[RED] Press ► Deepens red. [WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 – +255 (factory default is +255)
[WHITE BALANCE LOW]: -127 – +127 (factory default is 0)
Press ◄ Weakens red.
[GREEN] Press ► Deepens green.
Press ◄ Weakens green.
[BLUE] Press ► Deepens blue.
Press ◄ Weakens blue.

Note: Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting.


How do I adjust desired white balance based on existing color temperature settings?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

2) Press ◄►.

• The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to select anything other than [USER1] and [USER2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [CHANGE TO *****] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [USER1] or [USER2].

• The status of the color temperature changed is saved to the selected item.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The confirmation screen is displayed.

7) Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• The [USER1] or [USER2] data is overwritten.

• If you press ◄► to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the data will not be overwritten.

• The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen is displayed.

8) Press ▲▼ to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

9) Press ◄► to adjust the level.

Note:

• Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting.

• When color temperature has been changed, the colors before and after the change will differ slightly.


How do I change the name of [USER1] or [USER2] color temperature settings?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

2) Press ◄►.

• The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to select [USER1] or [USER2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼◄► to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

8) Press ▲▼◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• The name set to color temperature is changed.

Note: When a name is changed, display of [USER1], [USER2] is also changed.


How do I switch the gamma mode?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GAMMA].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Gamma Mode Description
[DEFAULT]*1 Gamma mode unique to this projector.
[USER1] Uses the gamma data registered by the user. (Registration requires separate software. Consult your dealer.)
[USER2]
[HDR ST2084-500] Gamma mode compliant with SMPTE ST 2084 that assumes a highest luminance of 500 cd/m² and supports HDR (High Dynamic Range).
[HDR ST2084-1000] Gamma mode compliant with SMPTE ST 2084 that assumes a highest luminance of 1 000 cd/m² and supports HDR (High Dynamic Range).
[HDR HLG] Gamma mode compliant with ITU-R BT.2100 (HLG: Hybrid Log Gamma system) that supports HDR (High Dynamic Range).
[DICOM SIM.] The picture becomes similar to that of DICOM standard.
[1.0] Set so that images become as you like. [2.0] – [2.8] can be set in increments of 0.1.
[1.8]
[2.0] – [2.8]

*1 When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC], [USER], or [DICOM SIM.], [DEFAULT] cannot be selected.

Note:

• DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images.

• In the following cases, the gamma mode is automatically set based on the InfoFrame information while displaying the image with the InfoFrame information added, so the gamma mode cannot be selected. If the information necessary for supporting HDR (High Dynamic Range) is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, it will follow the [GAMMA] setting.

– When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], and the HDMI input is selected

– When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DisplayPort IN] → [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], and the DisplayPort input is selected

– When [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] under the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] is set to [ENABLE], and the input corresponding to that setting is selected


How do I set the [HDR HLG SYSTEM GAMMA]?

Set the system gamma to be applied to the [USER1], [USER2], and [HDR HLG] gamma modes. This system gamma is defined by the ITU-R BT.2100 standard.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GAMMA].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to select [USER1], [USER2], or [HDR HLG], and press the <ENTER> button.

• The [GAMMA] screen is displayed.

• When [HDR HLG] is selected, proceed to Step 5).

4) Press ▲▼ to select [HDR HLG SYSTEM GAMMA].

5) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

• [1.00] – [1.62] can be set in increments of 0.01.


How do I change the name of [USER1] or [USER2] gamma settings?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GAMMA].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to select [USER1] or [USER2].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [GAMMA] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [GAMMA NAME CHANGE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [GAMMA NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼◄► to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

8) Press ▲▼◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• The selected gamma name is changed.

Note: When a name is changed, display of [USER1], [USER2] is also changed.


How do I adjust [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]?

You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] No correction.
[1] – [6] Corrects the vividness of the image. The larger the value, the stronger the correction.

How do I adjust the sharpness?

You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SHARPNESS].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to adjust the level.

Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
Press ► Contours become sharper. 0 – +15
Press ◄ Contours become softer.

Note: If you press ► while the adjustment value is [+15], the value will become [0]. If you press ◄ while the adjustment value is [0], the value will become [+15].


How do I adjust [NOISE REDUCTION]?

You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [NOISE REDUCTION].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] No correction.
[1] – [6] Compensates the noise. The larger the value, the stronger the compensation of the noise.

Attention: When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from what it originally was. In such a case, set it to [OFF].


How do I adjust [DYNAMIC CONTRAST]?

Light adjustment of the light source and signal compensation are performed automatically according to the image to make the contrast optimum for the image.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].

2) Press ◄►.

• The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] Disables the dynamic contrast function.
[1] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a small extent.
[2] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a moderate extent.
[3] Adjusts the light source and compensates signals to a large extent.
[USER] Set any desired correction. Refer to “Performing desired correction”.

• If [1], [2], or [3] is selected, proceed to Step 4):

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select the item to set.

• When [CONTRAST MODE] is selected, the items will switch each time you press ◄►.

• When [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is selected, press the <ENTER> button.

Setting item Value Details
[CONTRAST MODE] (Correction mode setting) [1] Select this item when misadjusted black level (grayish black) is bothersome in the dark scenes. Performs conventional correction to adjust the black level by decreasing the general brightness.
[2] Select this item when topical radiance is required even in dark scenes. Performs standard correction of the projector that does not decrease the brightness too much. (Factory default setting)
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] Sets the contrast synchronization function. This setting item is common with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

Note:

• Always use the contrast synchronization function when combining the projected images from multiple projectors to display a single image.

• The contrast synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

– All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors)

– [MODE] of [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].

– [CONTRAST SYNC] on the projectors to perform the contrast synchronization is set to [ON].

– If all linked projectors have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1] or [2], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.

– If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.


How do I perform desired correction for [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] when [USER] is selected?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [DYNAMIC CONTRAST].

2) Press ◄►.

• The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to select [USER].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select the item to set.

• The items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press ◄►.

• Press the <ENTER> button when [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] is selected.

Setting item Value Details
[CONTRAST MODE] (Correction mode setting) [1] Select this item when misadjusted black level (grayish black) is bothersome in the dark scenes. Performs conventional correction to adjust the black level by decreasing the general brightness.
[2] Select this item when topical radiance is required even in dark scenes. Performs standard correction of the projector that does not decrease the brightness too much. (Factory default setting)
[AUTO CONTRAST] (Automatic light source adjustment) [OFF] Does not adjust the light source.
[1] – [255] The higher the value, the stronger the light adjustment of the light source. Can be set in increments of 1.
[BRILLIANT CORRECTION] (Adjustment of aperture diaphragm control) [OFF] Does not correct brightness even in a scene with radiance.
[1] Slightly corrects brightness in a scene with radiance.
[2] Moderately corrects brightness in a scene with radiance. (Factory default setting)
[3] Strongly corrects brightness in a scene with radiance. This setting will maximize the brightness.
[BRIGHT SIGNAL LEVEL] (Setting of the brightness level of the signal to start the light adjustment) [6%] – [50%] Adjusts the light source when the brightness level of the image signal being input gets lower than the set value. The higher the value, the larger the range to perform the light adjustment of the light source. Can be set in increments of 1%. (Factory setting: 30%)
[LIGHTS OUT TIMER] (Time setting until the light turns off) [DISABLE] Does not turn off the light source.
[0.0s] – [10.0s] Turns off the light source when the brightness level of the image signal being input goes under the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]. Select an item from [0.0s] – [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.0s] – [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL] (Setting of the brightness level of the signal to turn off the light) [0%] – [5%] Sets the level of the brightness of the image signal to turn off the light source with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER]. Can be set in increments of 1%. (Factory setting: 0%)
[LIGHTS OUT FADE-IN] (Setting of fade-in when lighting up again) [OFF] Does not set the fade-in of the image when the light source is turned on again from the condition that the light source was turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
[0.5s] – [10.0s] Sets the time to fade in the image when the light source is turned on again from the condition that the light source was turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER]. Select an item from [0.5s] – [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] – [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[LIGHTS OUT FADE-OUT] (Setting of fade-out when lighting off) [OFF] Does not set the fade-out of the image when the light source is turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER].
[0.5s] – [10.0s] Sets the time to fade out the image when the light source is turned off with [LIGHTS OUT TIMER]. Select an item from [0.5s] – [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] – [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.
[MANUAL INTENSITY] (Manual light source adjustment) [0] – [255] The larger the value, the stronger the correction. Can be set in increments of 1. (Factory setting: 255)
[DYNAMIC GAMMA] (Adjustment of signal compensation) [OFF] Does not compensate the signal.
[1] Slightly compensates the signal.
[2] Moderately compensates the signal.
[3] Strongly compensates the signal. This setting will maximize the contrast.
[MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] Sets the contrast synchronization function. This setting item is common with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

Note:

• [BRILLIANT CORRECTION] cannot be set when [CONTRAST MODE] is set to [1].

• [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL], [LIGHTS OUT FADE-IN], and [LIGHTS OUT FADE-OUT] cannot be set when [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to [DISABLE].

• When [LIGHTS OUT TIMER] is set to anything other than [DISABLE], the following are the conditions to turn the light source back on again from the state that the light source has turned off by this function:

– When the brightness level of the image signal being input has exceeded the value set in [LIGHTS OUT SIGNAL LEVEL]

– When the input signal is gone

– When on-screen display such as menu screen (OSD) or input guide, a test pattern, or a warning message is displayed

– When the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32°F) and the light source is forced to turn on due to warm-up

• The contrast synchronization function is a function to display a combined screen with a balanced contrast by sharing the brightness level of the image signal input to each projector when a multi-display is constructed by combining the projected image of multiple projectors.

• The contrast synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

– All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors)

– [MODE] of [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].

– [CONTRAST SYNC] on the projectors to perform the contrast synchronization is set to [ON].

– If all linked projectors have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1] or [2], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.

– If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1], regardless of the [CONTRAST SYNC] setting.


How do I set the color space?

Set the color space used for the color representation of the image.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [COLOR SPACE].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [COLOR SPACE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[NATIVE] Displays the image with a color space unique to this projector.
[ITU-709] Displays the image with a color space compliant with the ITU-R BT.709 standard.
[DCI-P3 emu.] Displays the image with a color space close to DCI-P3.
[ITU-2020 emu.] Displays the image with a color space close to the ITU-R BT.2020 standard.

Note:

• DCI-P3 is the specifications of the digital cinema color region defined by the Digital Cinema Initiatives (DCI).

• In the following cases, the color space is automatically set based on the InfoFrame information while displaying the image with the InfoFrame information added, so the [COLOR SPACE] cannot be set. If the information necessary for supporting HDR (High Dynamic Range) is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, it will follow the [COLOR SPACE] setting.

– When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN] → [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], and the HDMI input is selected

– When the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [DisplayPort IN] → [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], and the DisplayPort input is selected

– When [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] under the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN] is set to [ENABLE], and the input corresponding to that setting is selected


How do I set the system method for input signal detection ([SYSTEM SELECTOR])?

The projector will automatically detect the input signal, but you can set the system method manually when an unstable signal is input. Set the system method matching the input signal.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SYSTEM SELECTOR] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select a system format.

• Available system formats vary depending on the input signal.

Input System format
HDMI input, DIGITAL LINK input 480/60p or 576/50p signal Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YCBCR].
Signals other than above Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YPBPR].
DisplayPort input, DIGITAL LINK input, PressIT input, SLOT input Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YPBPR].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

Note:

• For details of the types of image signals that can be used with the projector, refer to “List of compatible signals”.

• This may not function properly depending on the connected external device.

• The selection item for the DIGITAL LINK input can be selected when the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in the slot.

• The selection item for the PressIT input can be selected when the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed in the slot.

• The selection item for the SLOT input can be selected when the Function Board from other manufacturers is installed in the slot.

• For the SDI input, the signal format can be set in detail in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SLOT IN].


How do I set the projector for sRGB-compliant image reproduction?

sRGB is an international standard (IEC61966-2-1) for color reproduction defined by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission). Set according to the following steps to reproduce more faithful, sRGB compliant colors.

1) Set [COLOR MATCHING] to [OFF].

• Refer to [COLOR MATCHING] in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu.

2) Display the [PICTURE] menu.

• Refer to “[PICTURE] menu”.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [PICTURE MODE].

4) Press ◄► to set [NATURAL].

5) Press ▲▼ to select [COLOR].

6) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to set the factory default setting.

7) Follow Steps 5) to 6) to set [TINT], [COLOR TEMPERATURE], [GAMMA], and [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] to the factory default settings.

Note: sRGB is available for RGB signal input only.


How do I adjust the image position (shift)?

Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image projected on the screen is still out of position even when the positions of the projector and screen are correct.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SHIFT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SHIFT] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼◄► to adjust the position.

Orientation Operation Adjustment
Vertical (up and down) adjustment Press ▲ The image position moves up.
Press ▼ The image position moves down.
Horizontal (right and left) adjustment Press ► The image position moves to the right.
Press ◄ The image position moves to the left.

Note:

• When the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device is connected, set the shift and aspect from the menu of DIGITAL LINK output supported device first.

• For the portrait setting, image position is moved horizontally when “Vertical (up and down) adjustment” is made. Image position is moved vertically when “Horizontal (right and left) adjustment” is made.


How do I switch the aspect ratio?

You can switch the aspect ratio of the image. The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN SETTING] → [SCREEN FORMAT]. Set [SCREEN FORMAT] first.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ASPECT].

2) Press ◄► or the <ENTER> button.

• The [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[DEFAULT] Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.
[THROUGH] Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.
[16:9] Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9 when standard signals are input*1. When wide-screen signals are input*2, the images are displayed without changing the aspect ratio.
[4:3] Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input*1. When wide-screen signals are input*2, and [4:3] is selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the image is displayed by converting the aspect ratio to 4:3. When anything other than [4:3] is selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the images are reduced to be displayed without changing input aspect ratio so that the images will fit in the 4:3 screen.
[H FIT] Displays images using the entire width of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When a signal has an aspect ratio that is vertically longer than the screen aspect ratio selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], areas that exceed the height of the screen range will not be displayed.
[V FIT] Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When a signal has an aspect ratio that is horizontally longer than the screen aspect ratio selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], areas that exceed the width of the screen range will not be displayed.
[HV FIT] Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].

*1 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.

*2 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 17:9, 16:10, 16:9, 15:10, or 15:9.

Note:

• If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals. Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.

• If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio adjustment and zoom function.

• If conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the creator of the images.


How do I adjust the zoom when [ASPECT] is set to other than [DEFAULT] and [THROUGH]?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ZOOM].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [INTERLOCKED].

4) Press ◄► to switch the item.

Setting Description
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON] Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].

• If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].

6) Press ◄► to adjust.

Note: When [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.


How do I adjust the zoom when [ASPECT] is set to [DEFAULT]?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ZOOM].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [MODE].

4) Press ◄► to switch the item.

Setting Description
[INTERNAL] Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].
[FULL] Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].

5) Press ▲▼ to select [INTERLOCKED].

6) Press ◄► to switch the item.

Setting Description
[OFF] Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.
[ON] Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL].

• If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].

8) Press ◄► to adjust.

Note: When [ASPECT] is not set to [DEFAULT], [MODE] is not displayed.


How do I select a geometric adjustment type using the [GEOMETRY] menu?

You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] Does not perform geometric adjustment.
[KEYSTONE] Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.
[CORNER/PINCUSHION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.
[CURVED CORRECTION] Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.
[PC-1]
[PC-2]
[PC-3]
Select this item when performing correction using a computer and “Geometric & Setup Management Software”*1. Up to three correction data can be saved.

*1 “Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/ (registration and login required).

Note:

• The menu, logo, or waveform monitor display may run off the screen when [GEOMETRY] is set.

• If [EDGE BLENDING] adjustment and [GEOMETRY] are used together, correct edge blending adjustment may not be possible in certain environments.

• The [GEOMETRY] setting is disabled when the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [QUAD PIXEL DRIVE] is set to [OFF], and the geometric adjustment function cannot be used.

• The image may disappear for a moment or may be disrupted while performing adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.


How do I set [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION] geometry adjustments?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press ◄► to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED CORRECTION].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY:CURVED CORRECTION] screen is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select the item to adjust (e.g., [LENS THROW RATIO], [VERTICAL KEYSTONE], [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE], etc.).

5) Press ◄► to adjust.

For [KEYSTONE] adjustments, you can set:

• [LENS THROW RATIO]: Set the throw ratio.

• [VERTICAL KEYSTONE]: Adjusts vertical trapezoidal distortion.

• [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]: Adjusts horizontal trapezoidal distortion.

• [VERTICAL BALANCE]: Adjust setting according to lens shift range in vertical direction.

• [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]: Adjust setting according to lens shift range in horizontal direction.

• [FREE GRID]: Finer adjustment is possible by selecting points or lines. Refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]”.

For [CURVED CORRECTION] adjustments, you can set:

• [LENS THROW RATIO]: Set the throw ratio.

• [VERTICAL KEYSTONE]: Adjusts vertical trapezoidal distortion.

• [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]: Adjusts horizontal trapezoidal distortion.

• [VERTICAL ARC]: Adjusts vertical arc distortion.

• [HORIZONTAL ARC]: Adjusts horizontal arc distortion.

• [VERTICAL BALANCE]: Adjust setting according to lens shift range in vertical direction.

• [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]: Adjust setting according to lens shift range in horizontal direction.

• [MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO]: Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.

• [FREE GRID]: Finer adjustment is possible by selecting points or lines. Refer to “Adjusting distortion with [FREE GRID]”.


How do I set [CORNER/PINCUSHION] geometry adjustments?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press ◄► to select [CORNER/PINCUSHION].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [GEOMETRY:CORNER/PINCUSHION] screen is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.

• Items include [UPPER LEFT], [UPPER RIGHT], [LOWER LEFT], [LOWER RIGHT], [LINEARITY], [PINCUSHION] ([UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], [RIGHT]), [FREE GRID].

• When [LINEARITY] is selected, press ◄► to select either adjustment method ([AUTO] or [MANUAL]). Select [AUTO] normally. For details of operation when [MANUAL] is selected, refer to “Adjusting to desired linearity”.

5) Press ▲▼◄► to adjust.


How do I adjust to desired linearity in [CORNER/PINCUSHION] geometry settings?

This is for when [MANUAL] is selected under [LINEARITY] in the [CORNER/PINCUSHION] settings.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press ◄► to select [CORNER/PINCUSHION].

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [GEOMETRY:CORNER/PINCUSHION] screen is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select [LINEARITY].

5) Press ◄► to select [MANUAL].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LINEARITY] screen is displayed (showing horizontal and vertical direction grids).

7) Press ▲▼◄► to adjust.


How do I adjust distortion with [FREE GRID] in geometry settings?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press ◄► to select an item other than [OFF] (i.e., [KEYSTONE], [CORNER/PINCUSHION], or [CURVED CORRECTION]).

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select [FREE GRID].

5) Press ◄► to select an item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] Disables the adjustment to be performed with [FREE GRID].
[ON] Enables the adjustment to be performed with [FREE GRID].

• Proceed to Step 6) when [ON] is selected.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [FREE GRID] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [GRID RESOLUTION].

8) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Resolution Description
[2×2] Performs the adjustment using the pattern of the outer border (there are two lines each vertically and horizontally as a grid line).
[3×3] Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into two in the horizontal direction and also in the vertical direction.
[5×5] Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into four in the horizontal direction and also in the vertical direction. (Factory default setting)
[9×9] Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into eight in the horizontal direction and also in the vertical direction.
[17×17] Performs the adjustment using the grid pattern divided into 16 in the horizontal direction and also in the vertical direction.

9) Press ▲▼ to select [CONTROL POINTS].

10) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Control Point Type Description
[POINT] Select this item when adjusting by selecting one intersection from the intersections on the grid lines.
[HORIZONTAL LINE] Select this item when selecting all the intersections on one horizontal grid line, and adjusting them simultaneously.
[VERTICAL LINE] Select this item when selecting all the intersections on one vertical grid line, and adjusting them simultaneously.

11) Press ▲▼ to select [GRID WIDTH].

12) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

• [1] – [10]: Select the width of the grid line. It can be set between 1 line to 10 lines. (Factory default setting varies by model).

13) Press ▲▼ to select [GRID COLOR].

14) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Grid Color Description
[WHITE], [BLACK], [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW] Displays the pattern of the selected color. (Factory default setting: [RED])
[OFF] Does not display the pattern.

15) Press ▲▼ to select [CONTROL POINTS COLOR].

16) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

• Options: [WHITE], [BLACK], [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW]. Selects the color of the marker that indicates the control point. (Factory default setting: [WHITE])

17) Press ▲▼ to select [EXECUTE].

18) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The screen switches to the control point selection mode.

19) Press ▲▼◄► to select the control point.

• Move the marker over the intersection of the grid lines to adjust.

• When [HORIZONTAL LINE] is selected in Step 10), press ▲▼ to select the control point.

• When [VERTICAL LINE] is selected in Step 10), press ◄► to select the control point.

20) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The control point is confirmed, and the screen switches to the adjustment mode.

21) Press ▲▼◄► to adjust the position of the control point.

• By adjusting the position of the control point, the range to the neighboring intersections will be corrected.

• To continuously adjust the position of the other intersection, press the <MENU> button or the <ENTER> button to return to Step 19).

• Pressing the <MENU> button twice allows to reselect [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR].

Note:

• The contents adjusted in [FREE GRID] are saved as individual correction data for [KEYSTONE], [CORNER/PINCUSHION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3].

• Even if [GRID RESOLUTION] or [CONTROL POINTS] is reselected, the correction data adjusted before the reselection is maintained.

• By selecting more narrow grid pattern with [GRID RESOLUTION], the range of effect of the control point position adjustment will be smaller. To perform topical fine adjustment, it is recommended to adjust by setting [GRID RESOLUTION] to [17×17].

• The image is not displayed correctly when the position of the control point exceeds the neighboring intersections.

• The settings of [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR] are synchronized with the setting items under each item of [KEYSTONE], [CORNER/PINCUSHION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3].


How do I initialize adjustments for [FREE GRID]?

Initialize the correction data adjusted with [FREE GRID] and restore the factory default settings (the state where no correction is performed). Simultaneously the settings of [GRID RESOLUTION], [CONTROL POINTS], [GRID WIDTH], [GRID COLOR], and [CONTROL POINTS COLOR] are restored to the factory default settings.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [GEOMETRY].

2) Press ◄► to select the item to initialize its correction data in [FREE GRID] (i.e., [KEYSTONE], [CORNER/PINCUSHION], or [CURVED CORRECTION]).

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The screen for the selected item is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select [FREE GRID].

5) Press ◄► to select [ON].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [FREE GRID] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [INITIALIZE].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The confirmation screen is displayed.

9) Press ◄► to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note:

• Each correction data for [KEYSTONE], [CORNER/PINCUSHION], [CURVED CORRECTION], [PC-1], [PC-2], and [PC-3] cannot be initialized at once. To initialize all the correction data, select each item and execute [INITIALIZE] individually.

• When the projector is initialized by one of the following methods, all data in [FREE GRID] are initialized:

– When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]

– When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to [INITIALIZE]


How do I adjust [CONVERGENCE]?

Correct the position shift of the three primary colors of red, green, and blue in the projected image.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [CONVERGENCE].

2) Press ◄► to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] Disables the convergence function.
[ON] Enables the convergence function.

• Proceed to Step 3) when [ON] is selected.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [CONVERGENCE] screen is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select the color to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.

5) Press ▲▼◄► to select the position on the projected image to adjust and adjustment direction, and press ◄► to adjust.

Note:

• The picture quality may degrade when the convergence function is used.

• Perform the adjustment by the convergence function when the projected image has stabilized. When using certain lenses (e.g., ET-D3LEW200, ET-D3LEU100), it is recommended to adjust after a specific warm-up time with the focus test pattern displayed. For details of the test pattern, refer to “[TEST PATTERN] menu”.


What is the [0-1023] setting in the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu used for?

Select this item when the signal output from the DVI-D terminal or HDMI terminal of the external device (such as a computer) is input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter.

Note:

• The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device.


How do I set [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [AUTO GAMMA SELECT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ENABLE] Select this item when the gamma mode is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] is set to [HDR ST2084-500], [HDR ST2084-1000], or [HDR HLG].
[DISABLE] Select this item when the gamma mode is not to be automatically set and to specify the gamma mode with the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Note:

• Even if [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the gamma mode is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].


How do I set [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ENABLE] Select this item when the color space is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE] is set to [ITU-2020 emu.].
[DISABLE] Select this item when the color space is not to be automatically set and to specify the color space with the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Note:

• Even if [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the color space is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].


How do I set [EDID SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [EDID SELECT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[4K/30p/HDR] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz). This is EDID supporting HDR (High Dynamic Range).
[4K/30p/SDR] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz). This is EDID supporting SDR (Standard Dynamic Range). This does not support HDR (High Dynamic Range).
[2K] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K image signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.
[4K/60p] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz).

Note:

• Switch the setting to [4K/30p/HDR] or [4K/30p/SDR] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p] and the 4K image signal is input.

• Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p], [4K/30p/HDR], or [4K/30p/SDR] and the 2K image signal or lower is input.

• For details of the signal described in EDID of [4K/60p], [4K/30p/HDR], [4K/30p/SDR], or [2K], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals”.


How do I set [EDID MODE] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [EDID MODE].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [DIGITAL LINK EDID MODE] screen is displayed.

5) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[SCREEN FIT]*1 Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.

*1 PT-RZ24K and PT-RZ17K only

• Proceed to Step 10) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [RESOLUTION].

• Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p], [1440x900p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], [1920x1200p], [2048x1080p], [2560x1440p], [2560x1600p], or [3840x2400p].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.

9) Press ▲▼ to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].

• The setting is fixed to [30Hz] when [3840x2400p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

• Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [2048x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

• Select [120Hz], [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

• Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

• Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION]: [3840x2400p], [2048x1080p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]

10) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The confirmation screen is displayed.

11) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note:

• The settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in [EDID STATUS].

• The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.

• The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after configuring settings.

• A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video device.


How do I set [DIGITAL LINK OUT] in [SLOT IN] (DIGITAL LINK input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [DIGITAL LINK OUT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ENABLE] Select this item to output the DIGITAL LINK signal (including the audio signal) input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal from the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.
[DISABLE] Select this item not to output the DIGITAL LINK signal from the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal.

Note:

• The DIGITAL LINK signal input to the <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> terminal is output from the <DIGITAL LINK OUT> terminal only when the projector is in projection mode. It will not be output when the projector is in standby mode.


How do I set [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [SLOT IN] (PressIT input) when the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
[64-940] Fixes to [64-940].
[0-1023] Fixes to [0-1023].

How do I set [SIGNAL LEVEL] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input) when a Function Board by other manufacturers is installed?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[AUTO] Automatically sets the signal level.
[64-940] Fixes to [64-940].
[0-1023] Fixes to [0-1023].

Note:

• The optimal setting varies depending on the installed Function Board and the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the Operating Instructions of the Function Board and the external devices.


How do I set [EQUALIZER] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [EQUALIZER].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

• Adjust while viewing the image.

Setting Description
[0] – [7] Change the setting when the projected image does not stabilize. The higher the value, correction by the equalizer becomes stronger. (Factory default setting: [0])

How do I set [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [AUTO GAMMA SELECT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ENABLE] Select this item when the gamma mode is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA] is set to [HDR ST2084-500], [HDR ST2084-1000], or [HDR HLG].
[DISABLE] Select this item when the gamma mode is not to be automatically set and to specify the gamma mode with the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].

Note:

• Even if [AUTO GAMMA SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the gamma mode is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [GAMMA].


How do I set [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ENABLE] Select this item when the color space is to be automatically set to the one compatible with HDR (High Dynamic Range) based on the InfoFrame information added to the image signal. In such case, the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE] is set to [ITU-2020 emu.].
[DISABLE] Select this item when the color space is not to be automatically set and to specify the color space with the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].

Note:

• Even if [AUTO COLOR SPACE SELECT] is set to [ENABLE], when the information required for the HDR (High Dynamic Range) support is not included in the InfoFrame information added to the displayed image signal, the color space is not automatically set and follows the setting in the [PICTURE] menu → [COLOR SPACE].


How do I set [EDID SELECT] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [EDID SELECT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[4K/60p/HDR] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz). This is EDID supporting HDR (High Dynamic Range).
[4K/60p/SDR] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 60 Hz). This is EDID supporting SDR (Standard Dynamic Range). This does not support HDR (High Dynamic Range).
[4K/30p] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 4K image signal (maximum 4 096 x 2 160 dots, maximum vertical scanning frequency 30 Hz).
[2K] Switches to EDID corresponding to the 2K image signal (maximum 1 920 x 1 200 dots) or lower.

Note:

• Switch the setting to [4K/30p] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p/HDR] or [4K/60p/SDR] and the 4K image signal is input.

• Switch the setting to [2K] when proper image is not projected while [EDID SELECT] is set to [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/60p/SDR], or [4K/30p] and the 2K image signal or lower is input.

• For details of the signal described in EDID of [4K/60p/HDR], [4K/60p/SDR], [4K/30p], or [2K], refer to “List of plug and play compatible signals”.


How do I set [EDID MODE] in [SLOT IN] (SLOT input)?

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT IN].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [EDID MODE].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SLOT EDID MODE] screen is displayed.

5) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[DEFAULT] Standard setting.
[SCREEN FIT]*1 Changes the EDID data according to the [SCREEN FORMAT] setting.
[USER] Sets the [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] items to EDID.

*1 PT-RZ24K and PT-RZ17K only

• Proceed to Step 10) when [DEFAULT] or [SCREEN FIT] is selected.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [RESOLUTION].

• Select [1024x768p], [1280x720p], [1280x800p], [1280x1024p], [1366x768p], [1400x1050p], [1440x900p], [1600x900p], [1600x1200p], [1680x1050p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i], [1920x1200p], [2048x1080p], [2560x1440p], [2560x1600p], or [3840x2400p].

8) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] screen is displayed.

9) Press ▲▼ to select [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY].

• Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [30Hz] when [3840x2400p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

• Select [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [2048x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

• Select [120Hz], [60Hz], [50Hz], [30Hz], [25Hz], or [24Hz] when [1920x1080p] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

• Select [60Hz], [50Hz], or [48Hz] when [1920x1080i] is selected for [RESOLUTION].

• Select [60Hz] or [50Hz] when anything other than following is selected for [RESOLUTION]: [3840x2400p], [2048x1080p], [1920x1080p], [1920x1080i]

10) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The confirmation screen is displayed.

11) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note:

• The settings in [RESOLUTION] and [VERTICAL SCAN FREQUENCY] are displayed in [EDID STATUS].

• The resolution and vertical scanning frequency settings may also be required on your computer or video device.

• The computer, video device, or projector in use may require the power to be turned off and on again after configuring settings.

• A signal may not be output with the resolution and vertical scanning frequency that have been set, depending on your computer or video device.


How do I set the [OSD POSITION]?

Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [OSD POSITION].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[1] Sets to the upper left of the screen.
[2] Sets to the center left of the screen.
[3] Sets to the bottom left of the screen.
[4] Sets to the top center of the screen.
[5] Sets to the center of the screen.
[6] Sets to the bottom center of the screen.
[7] Sets to the upper right of the screen.
[8] Sets to the center right of the screen.
[9] Sets to the bottom right of the screen.

How do I set the [OSD ROTATION]?

Set the orientation of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [OSD ROTATION].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] Does not rotate the screen.
[CLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° clockwise.
[COUNTERCLOCKWISE] Rotates the screen by 90° counterclockwise.

How do I set the [OSD COLOR]?

Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [OSD COLOR].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[1] Sets to yellow.
[2] Sets to blue.
[3] Sets to white.
[4] Sets to green.
[5] Sets to peach.
[6] Sets to brown.

How do I set [OSD MEMORY]?

Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [OSD MEMORY].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ON] Holds the cursor position.
[OFF] Does not hold the cursor position.

Note:

• The cursor position is not maintained even if [OSD MEMORY] is set to [ON].


How do I set the [INPUT GUIDE]?

Set whether to display the input guide in the position set in [OSD POSITION]. Input guide is a screen to display information such as the currently selected input name, signal name, memory number, [BACKUP INPUT STATUS], etc.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [INPUT GUIDE].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ON] Displays the input guide.
[OFF] Hides the input guide.

How do I set the [WARNING MESSAGE] display?

Set the display/hide of the warning message.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [WARNING MESSAGE].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ON] Displays the warning message.
[OFF] Hides the warning message.

Note:

• If [OFF] is set, the warning message will not be displayed on the projected image even when warning condition such as [TEMPERATURE WARNING] is detected while using the projector. Also, the following countdown message is not displayed: the message until the power is turned off after the no signal shut-off function is executed; the message until the light source is turned off after the no signal lights-out function is executed.


How do I set the [MENU MODE]?

Set the display mode of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press ▲▼ to select [MENU MODE].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[NORMAL] Displays all menu items.
[SIMPLE] Displays some of the menu items that are used for basic setting or adjustment.

Note:

• For the menu items that are displayed when [SIMPLE] is set, refer to “Main menu” and “Sub-menu” in the PDF.


How do I set the [BACK COLOR] when no signal is input?

Set the display of the screen when a signal is not input.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [BACK COLOR] (from [DISPLAY OPTION] menu) or [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACK COLOR] (from [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu).

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[BLUE] Displays blue in the entire screen.
[BLACK] Displays black in the entire screen.
[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo in the screen.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user in the screen.

Note:

• The [BACK COLOR] setting item is common with the following menu item: The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [NO SIGNAL SETTING] → [BACK COLOR].

• If all of the following conditions are fulfilled, the [BACK COLOR] setting is disabled, and a blue image of 3840 x 2160/30p output from the 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is displayed:

– The optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in the slot.

– SLOT input is selected.

– Signal is not input to the SLOT input.

• To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website: https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

• When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G), setting for “NO SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.


How do I set the [STARTUP LOGO]?

Set the logo display when the power is turned on.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [STARTUP LOGO].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[DEFAULT LOGO] Displays the Panasonic logo.
[USER LOGO] Displays the image registered by the user.
[NONE] Disables the startup logo display.

Note:

• When [USER LOGO] is selected, the display of the startup logo will be kept for approximately 15 seconds.

• To create and register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software”. The software can be downloaded from the following website: https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

• When transferring logos via the optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (Model No.: ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G), setting for “NO SIGNAL SLEEP” of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device should be set to “OFF” to avoid interruption of communication.


How do I perform [GRADIENT CORRECTION] for uniformity?

Correction is performed in vertical and horizontal directions to approach the even condition when unevenness in one direction is occurring throughout the whole image.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [UNIFORMITY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [WHITE], [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

4) Press ◀▶ to adjust the level.

Item Operation Adjustment Range of adjustment
[VERTICAL] Press ▶ The lower-side color becomes pale, or the upper-side color becomes dark. -127 – +127
Press ◀ The upper-side color becomes pale, or the lower-side color becomes dark.
[HORIZONTAL] Press ▶ The left-side color becomes pale, or the right-side color becomes dark.
Press ◀ The right-side color becomes pale, or the left-side color becomes dark.

How do I perform [FLEXIBLE CORRECTION] for uniformity?

Correct the topical brightness unevenness and color unevenness using the correction value in the projector.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [UNIFORMITY].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [FLEXIBLE CORRECTION].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[GEOMETRY UNLINKED] Corrects the brightness unevenness and color unevenness using the correction value in the projector. The shape of the projected image and the compensation area of uniformity are not linked. Select this item to correct the brightness unevenness and the color unevenness of the light irradiated from the projection lens.
[OFF] Does not perform correction using the correction value in the projector. Select this item to prioritize the brightness of the whole projected image.
[GEOMETRY LINKED] Corrects the brightness unevenness and color unevenness using the correction value in the projector. When the geometric adjustment is performed, the shape of the projected image and the compensation area of uniformity are linked. Select this item when projecting at an angle against the flat screen, or when projecting on a curved screen.

• Proceed to Step 5) when anything other than [OFF] is selected.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [MODE].

6) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[CHROMA ONLY] Corrects only the color unevenness. Select this item to prioritize the brightness of the whole projected image.
[LUMINANCE/CHROMA] Corrects the brightness unevenness and the color unevenness.

Note:

• When [GEOMETRY LINKED] is selected, set the projection method and perform geometric adjustment, and then correct the uniformity.

• The correction value in the projector can be changed using the “Geometric & Setup Management Software”. “Geometric & Setup Management Software” can be downloaded from the following website: https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/ It is necessary to register and login to PASS to download.


How do I set the [MECHANICAL SHUTTER]?

The operation of the shutter function is set.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [MECHANICAL SHUTTER].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

Setting Description
[ENABLE] Closes the mechanical shutter when the shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed).
[DISABLE] Leaves the mechanical shutter opened and turns off the light source when the shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed).

Note:

• By closing the mechanical shutter, the malfunction of the DLP chip caused by high power laser ray entering the projection lens surface can be prevented. To close the mechanical shutter, set [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] to [ENABLE] and then set the shutter function to be enabled (shutter: closed).

• When [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is set to [ENABLE], it will take approximately 0.5 seconds from when the shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed) to the shutter function is disabled (shutter: opened).

• Even if [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is set to [DISABLE], the projector will go into the standby status with the mechanical shutter closed when [SHUT-OFF] is set to [CLOSE] and the power is turned off.

• The light source may turn on darker to warm up when the shutter function is used when the operating environment temperature is around 0 °C (32 °F) when [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is set to [DISABLE].


How do I set [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT] for the shutter function?

Set the image fade-in and fade-out when the shutter function operates.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

Item Setting Adjustment
[FADE-IN]
[FADE-OUT]
[OFF] Does not set fade-in or fade-out.
[0.5s] – [10.0s] Sets the fade-in or fade-out time. Select an item from [0.5s] – [4.0s], [5.0s], [7.0s], or [10.0s]. [0.5s] – [4.0s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.

Note:

• Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-out to cancel the fade operation.


How do I set the [STARTUP] behavior for the shutter function?

Automatically enable/disable the shutter function (shutter: closed/opened) when the power is turned on.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [STARTUP].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

Setting Description
[OPEN] The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function disabled (shutter: opened) when the power is turned on.
[CLOSE] The projector goes into projection mode with the shutter function enabled (shutter: closed) when the power is turned on.

How do I set the [SHUT-OFF] behavior for the mechanical shutter?

Sets to automatically opens/closes the mechanical shutter when the power is turned off.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SHUTTER SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [SHUT-OFF].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

Setting Description
[CLOSE] The projector goes into standby mode with the mechanical shutter closed when the projector is switched off.
[KEEP CURRENT STATE] The projector goes into standby mode with the condition of the mechanical shutter maintained when the projector is switched off.
[OPEN] The projector goes into standby mode with the mechanical shutter opened when the projector is switched off.

Note:

• Even if [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is set to [DISABLE], the projector will go into the standby status with the mechanical shutter closed when [SHUT-OFF] is set to [CLOSE] and the power is turned off.


How do I set up the shutter synchronization function?

The shutter synchronization function is a function to synchronize the shutter operation of the specified projector to other projectors, and the effect using the shutter function including the fade in/fade out operation can be synchronized. To use the shutter synchronization function, it is necessary to connect the projectors targeted for synchronization in a loop with daisy chain connection using the <MULTI SYNC IN> terminal and the <MULTI SYNC OUT> terminal. For details of how to connect the projectors, refer to “Connecting example when using the contrast synchronization function/shutter synchronization function” in the PDF.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SHUTTER SETTING] or [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] (from [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu).

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [SHUTTER SETTING] or [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.

3) If coming from [SHUTTER SETTING], press ▲▼ to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC], then press <ENTER>. The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.

4) Press ▲▼ to select [MODE].

5) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] Select this item when the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function are not used.
[MAIN] Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used. Set this item only on one of the linked projectors that becomes the synchronization source of the shutter operation.
[SUB] Select this item when the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function is used. Set this item in all the linked projectors excluding the projector set as the [MAIN].

• When anything other than [OFF] is selected, the diagnostic result is displayed in [LINK STATUS], indicating if all the projectors including the projectors targeted for synchronization are correctly connected, and if [MODE] or the [PICTURE] menu → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [CONTRAST MODE] is correctly set.

LINK STATUS Description
[LINKED] All the projectors are correctly connected, and correctly set. They are in the condition that the contrast synchronization function or the shutter synchronization function can be used.
[NO LINK] The projectors are not correctly connected, or not correctly set. Check the cable connection status and the projector setting for each projector that is linked.

6) Press ▲▼ to select [SHUTTER SYNC].

7) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[OFF] Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is not used.
[ON] Select this item when the shutter synchronization function is used.

Note:

• The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] setting item is common with the following menu items: The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] and The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

• The shutter synchronization function will operate when all of the following conditions are fulfilled:

– All the projectors to be linked are connected in a loop with the daisy chain connection. (Maximum 64 projectors)

– [MODE] on only one projector that is linked is set to [MAIN], and [MODE] on all other projectors are set to [SUB].

– [SHUTTER SYNC] on the projectors to perform the shutter synchronization is set to [ON].

– If all linked projectors have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1] or [2], regardless of the [SHUTTER SYNC] setting.

– If there is any projector that does not have the [CONTRAST MODE] setting menu, the [CONTRAST MODE] setting is unified to [1], regardless of the [SHUTTER SYNC] setting.

• It is possible to set [SHUTTER SYNC] to [OFF] for the projectors that are linked but not to synchronize.

• The shutter operation by the shutter synchronization function will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] on the projector that [MODE] is set to [MAIN].

• The operation of the mechanical shutter is not included in the shutter synchronization function.

• When the input signal to each linked projector is not synchronized, the timing of the shutter operation between the projectors may shift up to 1 frame while using the shutter synchronization function.

• The shutter function of the projector with [MODE] set to [SUB] can be operated individually. The shutter operation at this time will follow the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING] set in that projector.


How do I use the [FREEZE] function?

Use the freeze function to pause the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external device.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [FREEZE].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• Projected image is paused.

• Press the <MENU> button to release.

Note:

• [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.


How do I use and adjust the [WAVEFORM MONITOR]?

Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform. Check whether video output (luminance) signal level is within the recommended range for the projector and adjust.

Using the Waveform Monitor:

1) Press ▲▼ to select [WAVEFORM MONITOR].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

Setting Description
[OFF] Does not display the waveform monitor.
[ON] Displays the waveform monitor.

3) Press the <MENU> button two times to clear.

4) Press ▲▼ to select any horizontal line.

5) Press the <ENTER> button to switch the Select line to either luminance, red, green, or blue.

• Line selection items switch each time the <ENTER> button is pressed only when the waveform monitor is displayed.

“Select line (luminance)” Displayed in white waveform.
“Select line (red)” Displayed in red waveform.
“Select line (green)” Displayed in green waveform.
“Select line (blue)” Displayed in blue waveform.

Note:

• Setting is also available from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON].

• The waveform monitor is not displayed when on-screen display is hidden (off).

Adjusting the waveform (luminance):

Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk (0% (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) – 100 % (100 IRE)) and adjust.

1) Select “Select line (luminance)” on the waveform monitor.

2) Adjust black level.

• Adjust the black level 0 % of the image signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor using the [PICTURE] menu → [BRIGHTNESS].

3) Adjust white level.

• Adjust the white level 100 % of the image signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor using the [PICTURE] menu → [CONTRAST].

Adjusting red, green, and blue:

1) Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to [USER1] or [USER2].

2) Select “Select line (red)” on the waveform monitor.

3) Adjust dark red areas.

• Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to adjust the black level 0 % of the image signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor.

4) Adjust bright red areas.

• Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to adjust the white level 100 % of the image signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor.

5) Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust [GREEN] and [BLUE].

Note:

• Confirm that the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting of the input signal is correct before adjusting the black level. Check the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting in following menu in accordance with the input: The [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [HDMI IN]/[DisplayPort IN]/[SLOT IN] → [SIGNAL LEVEL].

• When [SCREEN SETTING] → [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [4:3], the signal outside the display area is displayed as a waveform in the waveform monitor with the signal level 0%.


How do I use the [CUT OFF] function for color components?

Each red, green, and blue color component can be removed.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [CUT OFF].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

Setting Description
[OFF] Disables cutoff.
[ON] Enables cutoff.

Note:

• When input is switched or a signal is switched, the cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).


How do I set the [PROJECTOR ID]?

The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [PROJECTOR ID].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[ALL] Select this item when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.
[1] – [64] Select this item when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.

Note:

• To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.

• When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer control. If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID numbers.

• Refer to “Setting ID number of the remote control” in the PDF for how to set the ID number on the remote control.


How do I set the [PROJECTION METHOD]?

Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector. Change the [FRONT/REAR] setting when the screen display is inverted. Change the [FLOOR/CEILING] setting when the screen display is upside down.

Setting [FRONT/REAR]

1) Press ▲▼ to select [PROJECTION METHOD].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [FRONT/REAR].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[FRONT] Select this item when installing the projector in front of the screen.
[REAR] Select this item when installing behind the screen (using translucent screen).

Setting [FLOOR/CEILING]

1) Press ▲▼ to select [PROJECTION METHOD].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [FLOOR/CEILING].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[AUTO] Automatically detects the attitude of the projector by the built-in angle sensor. Set [AUTO] normally.
[FLOOR] Select this item when installing the projector on a desk, etc.
[CEILING] Select this item when installing the projector with the top surface of the projector facing down such as ceiling attachment. Projected image is inverted upside down.

Note:

• Refer to “Angle sensor” in the PDF for details on the range of the installation attitude that can be detected by the built-in angle sensor.


How do I set or confirm the [LENS TYPE]?

When the projector is used for the first time or when the projection lens is replaced, confirm the [LENS TYPE] setting. Change the setting if the type is different from the projection lens attached to the projector. If the [LENS TYPE] information is written into the EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) built in the projection lens, that information is automatically acquired as the setting value of the projector when the projector is turned on.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS] screen is displayed, allowing to confirm the current setting in [LENS TYPE].

• To change the setting, proceed to Step 3).

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS TYPE].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS TYPE] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select an item.

• Select the type of projection lens attached to the projector.

Lens Type Description
ET-D75LE95 Select this item when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE95) is attached to the projector.
ET-D75LE50 Select this item when the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE50) is attached to the projector.
ET-D75LE6 Select this item when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE6) is attached to the projector.
ET-D75LE10 Select this item when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE10) is attached to the projector.
ET-D75LE20 Select this item when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE20) is attached to the projector. (Factory default setting)
ET-D75LE30 Select this item when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE30) is attached to the projector.
ET-D75LE40 Select this item when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE40) is attached to the projector.
ET-D75LE8 Select this item when the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE8) is attached to the projector.

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

Note:

• If a projection lens equipped with EEPROM is attached, the [LENS TYPE] setting is written into the EEPROM of the projection lens. If a projection lens without built-in EEPROM is attached, the [LENS TYPE] setting is saved in the projector as user data.

• If the standard DC motor unit installed in the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20, ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40, etc.) is replaced with the stepping motor unit using the Stepping Motor Kit (Model No.: ET-D75MKS10), [LENS TYPE] is set to [NOT SELECTED] when it is used for the first time. By selecting the type of the projection lens and pressing the <ENTER> button, selected [LENS TYPE] information is written to the EEPROM installed in the stepping motor unit.

• [LENS HOME POSITION], [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER], and [LENS CALIBRATION] cannot be executed when [LENS TYPE] is set to [NOT SELECTED].

• [LENS HOME POSITION], [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER], and [LENS CALIBRATION] will not operate correctly when [LENS TYPE] is set incorrectly.

• When a projection lens equipped with EEPROM is attached, [LENS TYPE] will not return to the factory default setting even when initialized by any of the following methods:

– When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]

– When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to [INITIALIZE]


How do I manage [LENS INFORMATION SETTING]?

Confirming the projection lens information

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS INFORMATION SETTING].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

[LENS ID] Displays the set ID.
[LENS NAME] Displays the set name.
[LENS TYPE] Displays the set projection lens type.
[LENS ZOOM TYPE] Displays the drive method of the zoom motor.

Note: [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] is not displayed when a projection lens without built-in EEPROM is attached.

Setting ID to the projection lens

Write the identification information unique to the projection lens into the EEPROM built in the projection lens. Set ID if required.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS INFORMATION SETTING].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS ID].

6) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

[ALL] Select this item when the ID number is not to be specified.
[1] – [255] Select this item when the ID number is to be set.

Note:

• [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] is not displayed when a projection lens without built-in EEPROM is attached.

• If the standard DC motor unit installed in the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20, ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40, etc.) is replaced with the stepping motor unit using the Stepping Motor Kit (Model No.: ET-D75MKS10), the [LENS ID] information is written into the EEPROM built in the stepping motor unit every time the [LENS ID] item is switched.

• [LENS ID] will not return to the factory default setting even when initialized by any of the following methods: When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]; When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to [INITIALIZE].

Setting name to the projection lens

A name for identifying individual projection lens can be written into the EEPROM built in the projection lens. Set the name if required.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS INFORMATION SETTING].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS NAME].

6) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼◀▶ to select the character, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the character.

8) Press ▲▼◀▶ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• Name of the projection lens is changed.

Note:

• [LENS INFORMATION SETTING] is not displayed when a projection lens without built-in EEPROM is attached.

• Factory default name is [LENS01].

• If the standard DC motor unit installed in the Zoom Lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20, ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40, etc.) is replaced with the stepping motor unit using the Stepping Motor Kit (Model No.: ET-D75MKS10), the [LENS NAME] information is written into the EEPROM built in the stepping motor unit.

• [LENS NAME] will not return to the factory default setting even when initialized by any of the following methods: When initialized by selecting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [FACTORY RESET]; When initialized by setting the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [INITIALIZE] → [USER SETTINGS] → [OTHER USER SETTING] to [INITIALIZE].


How do I use the [LENS MEMORY] feature?

The adjusted lens position (vertical position, horizontal position, focus position, and zoom position) can be saved and loaded.

Saving lens position

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS MEMORY].

4) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS MEMORY SAVE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen is displayed.

• If the lens memory has already been saved, the name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION]/[HORIZONTAL POSITION]/[FOCUS POSITION]/[ZOOM POSITION]) are displayed in the [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.

7) Press ▲▼ to select the item to save, and press the <ENTER> button. The confirmation screen is displayed.

• Current lens position information ([VERTICAL POSITION]/[HORIZONTAL POSITION]/[FOCUS POSITION]/[ZOOM POSITION]) is displayed in the confirmation screen.

8) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.

9) Press ▲▼◀▶ to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

10) After the name is input, press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• Saving of the lens memory is completed, and returns to the [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.

• If you press ▲▼ to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the lens memory will not be saved.

• If you press ▲▼ to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the entered name will not be registered and the default name will be used.

• If you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be used.

Note for saving: The numeric value information of the zoom position is displayed only in following cases: When the standard DC motor unit installed in certain Zoom Lenses is replaced with the stepping motor unit, or when a Zoom Lens with a stepping motor is attached.

Loading the lens position

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS MEMORY].

4) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS MEMORY LOAD].

6) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY LOAD] screen is displayed.

• The name of the saved lens memory and its lens position information are displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select the item to load, and press the <ENTER> button. The confirmation screen is displayed.

8) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• The lens will automatically move to the lens position of the loaded lens memory.

Note for loading:

• Lens memory is not guaranteed to be 100% reproduced. Readjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift after loading the lens memory if required.

• If the projection lens is replaced, execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS CALIBRATION], readjust the focus, zoom, and lens shift, and save the lens memory again.

• The lens memory for the zoom position will not operate when a projection lens without the zoom function is used.

• The numeric value information of the zoom position is displayed only in specific cases involving stepping motor zoom lenses.

• The saved lens memory is loaded in order every time the <FUNCTION> button is pressed when [LENS MEMORY LOAD] is assigned to the <FUNCTION> button.

Deleting a lens memory

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS MEMORY].

4) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].

6) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS MEMORY DELETE].

8) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY DELETE] screen is displayed, showing saved lens memory information.

9) Press ▲▼ to select the item to delete, and press the <ENTER> button. The confirmation screen is displayed.

10) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note for deleting: The numeric value information of the zoom position is displayed only in specific cases involving stepping motor zoom lenses.

Changing the lens memory name

1) Follow steps 1-6 for Deleting a lens memory to reach the [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE].

8) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed, showing saved lens memory information.

9) Press ▲▼ to select the name to change, and press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.

10) Press ▲▼◀▶ to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

11) After the name is changed, press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• Saving of the lens memory is completed, and returns to the [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen.

• If you press ▲▼ to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not be registered.

• If you press ▲▼ to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not be registered and the default name will be used.

• If you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be used.

Note for changing name: The numeric value information of the zoom position is displayed only in specific cases involving stepping motor zoom lenses.


How do I move the projection lens to the home position using [LENS HOME POSITION]?

Operate in following procedure to move the projection lens to the home position.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS HOME POSITION].

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The confirmation screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• The projection lens is moved to the home position.

Note:

• [PROGRESS] is displayed in the menu while the projection lens is moved to the home position.

• [LENS HOME POSITION] cannot be executed when the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS] → [LENS TYPE] is set to [NOT SELECTED].

• The [HOME POSITION] screen can also be displayed by pressing the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the remote control for three seconds or longer.

• [LENS HOME POSITION] can also be executed by pressing the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control while the lens shift adjustment screen is displayed.

• The home position varies depending on the projection lens type. For details, refer to “Lens shift range” in the PDF.


How do I manage the [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER]?

Enable/disable the active focus optimizer function. The shift in focus caused by the change of the image brightness can be reduced by enabling this function. It will also reduce the shift in focus right before enabling the shutter function (shutter: closed) and right after disabling the shutter function (shutter: opened).

Enabling/Disabling [ACTIVE FOCUS]

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER].

4) Press the <ENTER> button. The [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [ACTIVE FOCUS].

6) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

[OFF] Disables the active focus optimizer function.
[ON] Enables the active focus optimizer function.

Notes for [ACTIVE FOCUS]:

• [ACTIVE FOCUS] cannot be set when [LENS TYPE] is [NOT SELECTED].

• When set to [ON], focus adjustment is automatic with image brightness changes. Note for multi-display: image position may shift slightly; image may undulate during adjustment.

• Driving sound of the focus motor may be audible when [ON].

• Operation status ([ACTIVE]/[INACTIVE]) is shown in [ACTIVE FOCUS STATUS]. If [INACTIVE] when [ON], perform [LENS CALIBRATION].

• Operates within focus adjustment range; may not work properly at limits.

• May not operate correctly with optional Lens Fixed Attachment. Do not overtighten clasp.

• Parameters [FOCUS OFFSET BRIGHT] and [FOCUS OFFSET DARK] are displayed. These return to factory defaults if [SETUP ASSISTANT] isn’t run, [INITIALIZE] is executed, or <DEFAULT> is pressed.

• To reduce focus shift, set parameters via [SETUP ASSISTANT].

• [ACTIVE FOCUS] is set to [OFF] on factory reset or other user setting initialization.

Performing simplified setting using the internal test pattern ([SETUP ASSISTANT])

Set [FOCUS OFFSET BRIGHT] and [FOCUS OFFSET DARK] using the built-in test pattern.

1) Select [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [FOCUS OFFSET SETUP] → [SETUP ASSISTANT].

2) If [LIGHT OUTPUT] is 100.0%, internal pattern (approx. 50%) projects, [SETUP ASSISTANT] screen (1/8) appears. Proceed to step 4.

3) If [LIGHT OUTPUT] < 100.0%, confirmation screen appears. Press ▲▼ to select [NEXT], press <ENTER>. Projector operates at 100.0% during setup. Internal pattern projects, screen (1/8) appears. To cancel, select [CANCEL].

4) Wait until [Waiting time] turns [0s] (focus stabilizes). [NEXT] becomes selectable.

5) Select [NEXT], press <ENTER>. Screen (2/8) appears. ([BACK] returns to previous screen).

6) Select [FOCUS POSITION]. Adjust focus with ◀▶.

7) Select [NEXT], press <ENTER>. Screen (3/8) appears.

8) Select [TEST PATTERN], then choose [INTERNAL]. (Internal pattern approx. 100% for focus adjustment).

9) Select [NEXT], press <ENTER>. Screen (4/8) appears.

10) Wait until [Waiting time] turns [0s].

11) Select [NEXT], press <ENTER>. Screen (5/8) appears.

12) Select [FOCUS POSITION]. Adjust focus with ◀▶.

13) Select [NEXT], press <ENTER>. Screen (6/8) appears.

14) Select [TEST PATTERN], then choose [INTERNAL]. (Internal pattern approx. 0% for focus adjustment).

15) Select [NEXT], press <ENTER>. Screen (7/8) appears.

16) Wait until [Waiting time] turns [0s].

17) Select [NEXT], press <ENTER>. Screen (8/8) appears.

18) Select [FOCUS POSITION]. Adjust focus with ◀▶.

19) Select [STORE], press <ENTER>. Parameters are updated. [ACTIVE FOCUS] will be set to [ON].

Note: If set up with AC 100-120V, use with that supply. If changed to AC 200-240V, reset using [SETUP ASSISTANT].

Performing simplified setting using the external input image ([SETUP ASSISTANT])

Input a still image for focus adjustment from an external device.

1) Switch to the input displaying the focus adjustment image.

2) Follow steps 1-3 as in internal test pattern setup to reach the [SETUP ASSISTANT] screen (1/8).

3) Follow steps 4-7 as in internal test pattern setup to reach screen (3/8).

4) Select [TEST PATTERN], then choose [EXTERNAL].

[INTERNAL] Uses internal pattern.
[EXTERNAL] Uses input image. If [Brightness of the image] is too low, [NEXT] is disabled. Use bright image.

5) Follow steps 9-13 as in internal test pattern setup to reach screen (6/8).

6) Select [TEST PATTERN], then choose [EXTERNAL].

[INTERNAL] Uses internal pattern.
[EXTERNAL] Uses input image. If [Brightness of the image] is too high, [NEXT] is disabled. Use dark image.

7) Follow steps 15-19 as in internal test pattern setup to complete. [ACTIVE FOCUS] will be set to [ON].

Note: If set up with AC 100-120V, use with that supply. If changed to AC 200-240V, reset using [SETUP ASSISTANT].

Directly setting the parameter

Set parameters individually if optimal values are known, without [SETUP ASSISTANT].

1) Select [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [FOCUS OFFSET SETUP].

2) Select [FOCUS OFFSET BRIGHT] or [FOCUS OFFSET DARK].

3) Press ◀▶ to set the parameter.

Displaying the test pattern

Displays internal test pattern used with [SETUP ASSISTANT].

1) Select [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [FOCUS OFFSET SETUP].

2) Select [TEST PATTERN].

3) Select an item with ◀▶.

[OFF] Does not display test pattern.
[0%] Displays pattern of signal level approx. 0%.
[50%] Displays pattern of signal level approx. 50%.
[100%] Displays pattern of signal level approx. 100%.

Initializing the parameter

Returns [FOCUS OFFSET BRIGHT] and [FOCUS OFFSET DARK] for current [LENS TYPE] to factory defaults.

1) Select [LENS] → [ACTIVE FOCUS OPTIMIZER] → [FOCUS OFFSET SETUP].

2) Select [INITIALIZE], press <ENTER>. Confirmation screen appears.

3) Select [OK], press <ENTER>.


How do I perform [LENS CALIBRATION]?

Detect the lens adjustment limit value, and perform the calibration in the adjustment range. Execute the lens calibration after attaching the projection lens. Always execute the zoom calibration especially after attaching the Zoom Lens with the stepping motor.

Zoom Lens with the stepping motor

(Procedure when standard DC motor unit in certain Zoom Lenses is replaced with Stepping Motor Kit, or when Zoom Lens with stepping motor is attached.)

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS CALIBRATION].

4) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS CALIBRATION] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select an item:

[SHIFT/FOCUS/ZOOM] Executes calibrations for lens shift, focus, and zoom. Lens moves to home position after completion.
[SHIFT/FOCUS] Executes calibrations for lens shift and focus. Lens moves to home position after completion.
[ZOOM] Executes calibration of zoom adjustment range.

6) Press the <ENTER> button. Confirmation screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. Lens calibration starts. To cancel, select [CANCEL].

Notes for stepping motor:

• Pressing <FOCUS> button (3 sec) can show confirmation for [SHIFT/FOCUS/ZOOM].

• Pressing <ZOOM> button (3 sec) can show confirmation for [ZOOM].

• Cannot execute if [LENS TYPE] is [NOT SELECTED].

• [PROGRESS] shown during calibration; cannot be canceled.

• [INCOMPLETE] if not performed correctly.

• Lens mounter origin and lens home position auto-update on shift calibration. Home position is based on calibration, not optical center.

• Home position varies by lens type. Refer to “Lens shift range” in PDF.

Zoom Lens with DC motor, the Fixed-focus Lens

(Procedure for Zoom Lenses with non-replaced DC motor, or Fixed-focus Lenses without zoom.)

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [LENS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [LENS CALIBRATION].

4) Press the <ENTER> button. Confirmation screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

• Lens calibration starts. Shift, focus, (and zoom for Zoom Lens) are performed. Lens moves to home position after completion. To cancel, select [CANCEL].

Notes for DC motor/Fixed-focus: Similar to stepping motor notes regarding <FOCUS> button, [NOT SELECTED] LENS TYPE, [PROGRESS], [INCOMPLETE], origin/home position updates, and home position variation.


How do I configure [SLOT SETTING]?

Set the power supply to the slot. The content that can be set varies depending on the Function Board installed in the slot. This cannot be set when the Function Board is not installed.

[SLOT STANDBY]

Set the power supply during the standby mode.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT STANDBY].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

[ENABLE] The power is supplied to the Function Board even when the projector is in standby mode.
[DISABLE] The power supply to the Function Board is stopped when the projector goes into standby mode.

Note: [SLOT STANDBY] is fixed to [DISABLE] for 12G-SDI Terminal Board (TY-SB01QS), Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (TY-SB01WP), and Function Boards by other manufacturers.

[SLOT POWER ON]

Start the power supply that was stopped.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT POWER ON].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The power supply to the Function Board is started.

Note: Cannot be operated for 12G-SDI, DIGITAL LINK, or Wireless Presentation System Receiver Boards.

[SLOT FORCED TERMINATION]

Forcefully stop the power supply.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SLOT FORCED TERMINATION].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. Confirmation screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. Power supply to Function Board is stopped.

Note: Use only when Function Board needs forceful shutdown. Cannot be operated for 12G-SDI, DIGITAL LINK, or Wireless Presentation System Receiver Boards.


How do I configure [OPERATION SETTING]?

Set the operation method of the projector. Settings are reflected when “Initial setting (operation setting)” in [INITIAL SETTING] screen is already set. If changed while using projector, duration until brightness decreases to half may shorten or brightness may decrease.

Setting [OPERATING MODE]

1) Press ▲▼ to select [OPERATION SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [OPERATION SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [OPERATING MODE].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

Mode Description
[NORMAL] High luminance. Estimated runtime approx. 20,000 hours or more*1.
[ECO] Brightness decreases vs [NORMAL]. Prioritizes light source life. Estimated runtime approx. 24,000 hours or more*1.
[QUIET] Brightness decreases vs [NORMAL]. Prioritizes low noise. Estimated runtime approx. 20,000 hours or more*1.
[USER1]
[USER2]
[USER3]
Set [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL] and [LIGHT OUTPUT] individually.

*1 Estimated runtime until brightness halves, with [PICTURE] → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] at [3], under 0.15 mg/m³ dust. Estimate, not warranty.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [APPLY].

6) Press the <ENTER> button. Confirmation screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note: If consolidated runtime exceeds 20,000 hours, component replacement may be needed. Check [STATUS].

Setting [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL]

Adjust max level to correct screen brightness due to light source changes.

1) Select [OPERATION SETTING].

2) Press <ENTER>. Screen displays.

3) Select [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].

4) Press ◀▶ to adjust (8.0% – 100.0%). ▶ increases, ◀ decreases.

5) Select [APPLY].

6) Press <ENTER>. Confirmation displays.

7) Select [OK], press <ENTER>.

Note: Cannot adjust if [OPERATING MODE] is [NORMAL], [ECO], or [QUIET]. Brightness corrected here when [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] → [CONSTANT MODE] is [AUTO] or [PC].

Setting [LIGHT OUTPUT]

Adjust brightness of light source. Synchronized with [PROJECTOR SETUP] → [LIGHT OUTPUT].

1) Select [OPERATION SETTING].

2) Press <ENTER>. Screen displays.

3) Select [LIGHT OUTPUT].

4) Press ◀▶ to adjust.

Operation Brightness Runtime Range
Press ▶ Brighter Shorter 8.0% – 100.0%*1
Press ◀ Darker Longer

*1 Upper limit is value in [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].

5) Select [APPLY].

6) Press <ENTER>. Confirmation displays.

7) Select [OK], press <ENTER>.

Note: Can be adjusted individually for each [OPERATING MODE]. Uniformity for multi-display can be maintained by adjusting this for each projector.


What is the relationship between brightness and runtime?

The projector can be operated with arbitrary brightness and runtime by combining settings of [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL], [LIGHT OUTPUT], and [CONSTANT MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]. The values are estimates and graphs are examples, not warranty periods.

For PT-RQ25K, PT-RZ24K:

• When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF]:

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%) Brightness (lm) Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0% 20 000 29 100
90.0% 18 000 31 600
80.0% 16 000 34 500
70.0% 14 000 38 100
60.0% 12 000 42 400
50.0% 10 000 47 800

• When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]:

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%) Brightness (lm) Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
80.0% 16 000 14 400
70.0% 14 000 24 700
60.0% 12 000 36 500
50.0% 10 000 50 100
40.0% 8 000 66 300
30.0% 6 000 86 500

For PT-RQ18K, PT-RZ17K:

• When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [OFF]:

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%) Brightness (lm) Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
100.0% 16 000 39 300
90.0% 14 400 42 200
80.0% 12 800 45 700
70.0% 11 200 49 700
60.0% 9 600 54 500
50.0% 8 000 60 200

• When [CONSTANT MODE] is set to [AUTO] or [PC]:

[LIGHT OUTPUT] (%) Brightness (lm) Estimated runtime*1 (hours)
80.0% 12 800 18 700
70.0% 11 200 32 600
60.0% 9 600 48 400
50.0% 8 000 66 900
40.0% 6 400 89 100
30.0% 4 800 100 100

*1 For [OFF]: Estimated runtime until brightness halves. For [AUTO]/[PC]: Time brightness is maintained constant. Both with [PICTURE] → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] at [3], under 0.15 mg/m³ dust. Brightness gradually decreases after exceeding constant time for [AUTO]/[PC].

Note: Under influence of light source characteristics, use conditions, environment, etc., runtime may be shorter. If consolidated runtime exceeds 20,000 hours, component replacement may be needed.


How do I adjust the [LIGHT OUTPUT] from the main [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu?

Adjust the brightness of light source. This setting is reflected when it is already set with “Initial setting (operation setting)” or with the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING]. It’s synchronized with [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [LIGHT OUTPUT].

1) Press ▲▼ to select [LIGHT OUTPUT].

2) Press ◀▶ to adjust.

Operation Brightness Runtime Range
Press ▶ The screen becomes brighter. The runtime becomes shorter. 8.0% – 100.0%*1
Press ◀ The screen becomes darker. The runtime becomes longer.

*1 The upper limit of the adjustment range is the value set in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [OPERATION SETTING] → [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].

Note:

• [LIGHT OUTPUT] can be adjusted individually for each setting item of [OPERATING MODE].

• The uniformity of the brightness between multiple displays can be maintained by adjusting [LIGHT OUTPUT] for each projector when structuring a multi-display screen by combining the projected images from multiple projectors.


How do I set up and manage [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]?

The projector has an internal brightness sensor and brightness control function to correct brightness and white balance according to changes in the light source. This helps reduce variations in multi-projector setups. For synchronization, set the same administrator account (user name and password) on all linked projectors.

Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]

1) Press ▲▼ to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].

2) Press <ENTER>. The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].

4) Press <ENTER>. The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [CONSTANT MODE].

6) Press ◀▶ to switch the item ([OFF], [AUTO], [PC]).

[OFF] Does not perform automatic correction.
[AUTO] Performs automatic correction based on sensor measurement.
[PC] Synchronizes nine or more projectors using a computer and “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”*1.

*1 Downloadable from https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/

• Proceed to Step 9) when [OFF] or [PC] is selected.

7) If [AUTO] is selected, press ▲▼ to select [LINK].

8) Press ◀▶ to switch the item ([OFF], [GROUP A] – [GROUP D]).

[OFF] Performs correction by this projector alone. Duration of constant brightness is longer with smaller [LIGHT OUTPUT].
[GROUP A-D] Performs correction by synchronizing multiple projectors (up to 8 per group, 4 groups per network).

9) Press ▲▼ to select [REGULAR CALIBRATION].

10) Press ◀▶ to switch item ([OFF], [ON]). [ON] measures periodically at [CALIBRATION TIME].

• Proceed to Step 15) if [OFF] is selected for [REGULAR CALIBRATION].

11) Press ▲▼ to select [CALIBRATION TIME].

12) Press <ENTER>. Time blinks (adjustment mode).

13) Press ▲▼ to select “hour” or “minute”, and press ◀▶ or number buttons (0-9) to set time. “Hour” is in 1-hour increments, “minute” 00-59.

14) Press <ENTER>. [CALIBRATION TIME] is set.

15) Press ▲▼ to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].

16) Press ◀▶ to switch item ([ON] displays time to complete measurement, [OFF] does not).

17) Press ▲▼ to select [APPLY].

18) Press <ENTER>.

• If [CONSTANT MODE] is set to non-[OFF] for the first time (after purchase or factory reset), current brightness/color is set as target, auto correction starts.

• If [CONSTANT MODE] was previously non-[OFF] and target is already set, confirmation screen appears. Proceed to Step 19).

• If [LINK] is [GROUP A-D], group name displays on screens of projectors in that group.

19) Press ◀▶ to switch item ([YES] maintains previous target, [NO] reconfigures with current brightness/color).

20) Press <ENTER>. Starts automatic correction.

Notes for Brightness Control Setup:

• With [CONSTANT MODE] as [AUTO]/[PC], keep shutter open for at least 2 min after setup for sensor measurement.

• If shutter is closed within 10 min of light source on (with [AUTO]/[PC]), measurement may fail. Correction occurs ~2 min after shutter opens.

• Brightness/color stabilize ~8 min after light source on; auto-measurement occurs then.

• With [AUTO] mode and [LINK] as [OFF], brightness corrected to [MAX LIGHT OUTPUT LEVEL].

• Variation may increase due to dust. Readjust if variation increases or light source replaced.

• For >24 hr continuous use, set [REGULAR CALIBRATION] to [ON].

• Brightness control and dynamic contrast operate simultaneously, but dynamic contrast pauses during sensor measurement.

• Settings are reflected by selecting [APPLY] and pressing <ENTER>.

Displaying [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]

1) Press ▲▼ to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].

2) Press <ENTER>. The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS].

4) Press <ENTER>. The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen is displayed.

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] Screen Display Examples:

• When [CONSTANT MODE] is [OFF]: Shows “CONSTANT MODE OFF”, “PROJECTOR”.

• When [CONSTANT MODE] is [AUTO], [LINK] is [OFF]: Shows “LINK OFF”, “PROJECTOR”, error messages if any.

• When [CONSTANT MODE] is [AUTO], [LINK] is [GROUP A-D]: Shows “LINK GROUP A” (etc.), list of projectors in group with names and IP addresses, status colors, error messages, “UPDATE” option.

• When [CONSTANT MODE] is [PC]: Shows “CONSTANT MODE PC”, “PROJECTOR”, error messages if any.

Legend for status screen: 1: Projector name. 2: Synchronized group. 3: Projector IP. 4: Names/IPs of other projectors in group. 5: Status color (Green: allowance, Yellow: little allowance, Red: error). 6: Detailed error messages. 7: Error messages (e.g., “Failed to apply…”). 8: Update status.

Error Details Table:

Error message Measures to take
[Exceed maximum number of projectors.] • Limit projectors in one group to eight. • For nine or more, use computer and “Multi Monitoring & Control Software”.
[Please check the COMMAND CONTROL setting.] • Set admin password. • Set [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND CONTROL] to [ON] for error projector. • Set [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT] of all linked projectors to same value.
[Please check the USER NAME and PASSWORD in the COMMAND CONTROL setting.] • Set admin account (user/pass) of all linked projectors to same setting.
[Cannot apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL. Please check projector status.] • Projector is in standby. Switch on power.
[Brightness Sensor Error] • Problem with sensor. If persists after power cycle, consult dealer.

Note on status screen: If projectors not displayed, check for IP conflicts, LAN cable connections, same network, same [LINK] group settings. Refer to projector name/network config pages.

Brightness control adjustment procedure example (for 8 projectors):

1) Connect all projectors to a switching hub using LAN cables.

2) Switch on all projectors, start projection.

3) Set [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [OFF], select [APPLY], press <ENTER>.

4) Set [OPERATING MODE] of each projector to the same setting.

5) Set admin account, [SUBNET MASK], and [IP ADDRESS] of each projector. (Same admin user/pass, same subnet mask, different IP for each).

6) Wait at least 8 minutes after projection started for light source brightness to steady.

7) Set all [PICTURE] menu items of all projectors to same values.

8) Adjust [COLOR MATCHING] to match colors.

9) Display internal test pattern “All white” in all projectors.

10) Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] of all projectors to 100% or max possible (depends on [OPERATING MODE]).

11) Set [LIGHT OUTPUT] of projector with least brightness to 90% or 10% lower than its max.

12) Adjust [LIGHT OUTPUT] of other projectors so their brightness matches the least bright one.

13) Set [CONSTANT MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [AUTO], and [LINK] to [GROUP A] in all projectors.

14) Select [APPLY] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] and press <ENTER> in all projectors. Auto correction starts.

Note on procedure: Auto correction performed on light source on/off. Reset [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] if variation increases due to aging or light source replacement.


How do I set the [STANDBY MODE]?

Set the power consumption during standby.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [STANDBY MODE].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[NORMAL] Select this item when using the network function during standby.
[ECO] Select this item to reduce power consumption during standby.

Note:

• When [ECO] is set, the network function, the <SERIAL OUT> terminal, and some RS-232C commands become inoperable during standby. When [NORMAL] is set, the network function and the <SERIAL OUT> terminal can be used during standby.

• When [ECO] is set, it may take approximately 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on, compared with when [NORMAL] is set.

• When [NORMAL] is set, power can be supplied using the <DC OUT> terminal even if the projector is in standby mode. If [ECO] is set, power cannot be supplied in standby mode.


How do I configure [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT] and [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]?

These functions save power when there is no input signal. The setting items are common between [POWER MANAGEMENT] menu and [NO SIGNAL SETTING] menu.

[NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT]

Automatically turns off the light source if no input signal for a specific period.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [POWER MANAGEMENT] or [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press <ENTER>. The respective screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [NO SIGNAL LIGHTS-OUT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

[DISABLE] Disables the no signal lights-out function.
[10SEC.] – [5MIN.] Turns off light source after preset period of no signal. Select [10SEC.], [20SEC.], [30SEC.], [1MIN.], [2MIN.], [3MIN.], or [5MIN.].

Notes for No Signal Lights-Out:

• Fan rotates to cool projector; power indicator blinks slowly green.

• Light source turns back on if: signal input; OSD/test pattern/warning displayed; <POWER ON> pressed; shutter disable operation performed; operating temp is ~0°C (32°F) forcing warm-up.

• Function disabled if [BACK COLOR] is [DEFAULT LOGO] or [USER LOGO] and logo is displayed.

[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

Automatically sets projector to standby if no input signal for a specific period.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [POWER MANAGEMENT] or [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press <ENTER>. The respective screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

[DISABLE] Disables the no signal shut-off function.
[10MIN.] – [90MIN.] Sets time in increments of 10 minutes.

How do I set the [BACKUP INPUT SETTING]?

Set the backup function that switches the signal to the backup input signal as seamless as possible when input signal is disrupted. This setting item is common with the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].

1) Press ▲▼ to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [BACKUP INPUT SETTING].

4) Press the <ENTER> button. The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [BACKUP INPUT MODE].

6) Press the <ENTER> button. The [BACKUP INPUT MODE] screen is displayed.

7) Press ▲▼ to select the combination of the input and press the <ENTER> button.

Example for [HDMI1] as Primary:

Primary input Secondary input option Details
[HDMI1] [OFF] Disables the backup function.
[HDMI2] Enables the backup function (HDMI2 as backup for HDMI1).

8) Press the <MENU> button. The [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.

9) Press ▲▼ to select [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING]. (Cannot be selected if [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is [OFF]).

10) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

[ENABLE] Switches to secondary (or primary) input automatically on disruption.
[DISABLE] Disables automatic input switching function.

Note:

• Backup function enabled when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is not [OFF] and same signal to primary/secondary.

• To use backup: Set mode not [OFF]; same signal to both inputs; display primary or secondary image.

• Switching to other input cancels readiness. Reselect primary/secondary to re-enable.

• Input combination shown in [PRIMARY INPUT]/[SECONDARY INPUT] fields.

• [BACKUP INPUT STATUS] ([ACTIVE]/[INACTIVE]) shown in input guide/status screen.

• Seamless switch if [ACTIVE].

• If [AUTOMATIC SWITCHING] is [ENABLE] and status [ACTIVE], switches on disruption. Status becomes [INACTIVE]. Cannot switch back until original signal restored. Original input maintained after restoration.

• Primary input settings (Picture Mode, Gamma, Color Temp) apply.

• Cannot be selected if optional Function Board not installed.


How do I set the [SECONDARY INPUT] switching function?

Set the secondary input switching function that will automatically switch to the specified input when the input signal of projecting image is discontinued.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [NO SIGNAL SETTING].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [NO SIGNAL SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [SECONDARY INPUT].

4) Press the <ENTER> button. The [SECONDARY INPUT] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select the input to be specified as the switching destination, and press the <ENTER> button.

Option Description
[OFF] Disables the secondary input switching function.
[HDMI1] Sets the secondary input to HDMI1.
[HDMI2] Sets the secondary input to HDMI2.
[DisplayPort] Sets the secondary input to DisplayPort.
[SDI [SLOT]]*1 Sets the secondary input to SDI.
[DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]]*2 Sets the secondary input to DIGITAL LINK*3.
[PressIT [SLOT]]*4 Sets the secondary input to PressIT.
[SLOT]*5 Sets the secondary input to SLOT.

*1 Selectable with optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (TY-SB01QS) in <SLOT>.

*2 Selectable with optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (TY-SB01DL) in <SLOT>.

*3 Individual input on transmitter or DIGITAL LINK output device cannot be specified.

*4 Selectable with optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (TY-SB01WP) in <SLOT>.

*5 Selectable with Function Board by other manufacturers in <SLOT>.

Note: When [BACKUP INPUT SETTING] → [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is not [OFF], secondary input switching will not operate even if [SECONDARY INPUT] is not [OFF]. Backup input switching is prioritized.


How do I set the [INITIAL STARTUP] method?

Set the startup method when the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON>.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [INITIAL STARTUP].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[LAST MEMORY] Starts up the projector in the condition before the <MAIN POWER> switch is set to <OFF>.
[STANDBY] Starts up the projector in standby.
[ON] Starts projecting immediately.

How do I set the [STARTUP INPUT SELECT]?

Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [STARTUP INPUT SELECT].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [STARTUP INPUT SELECT] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select the input, and press the <ENTER> button.

Option Description
[LAST USED] Keeps the input selected last.
[HDMI1] Sets the input to HDMI1.
[HDMI2] Sets the input to HDMI2.
[DisplayPort] Sets the input to DisplayPort.
[SDI [SLOT]]*1 Sets the input to SDI.
[DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]]*2 Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK.
[PressIT [SLOT]]*3 Sets the input to PressIT.
[SLOT]*4 Sets the input to SLOT.
[INPUT1] – [INPUT10]*5 Sets the input to DIGITAL LINK, and switches the input of the DIGITAL LINK output supported device to the specified input.

*1 Selectable with optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (TY-SB01QS) in <SLOT>.

*2 Selectable with optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (TY-SB01DL) in <SLOT>.

*3 Selectable with optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (TY-SB01WP) in <SLOT>.

*4 Selectable with Function Board by other manufacturers in <SLOT>.

*5 When optional DIGITAL LINK output supported device (ET-YFB100G, ET-YFB200G) is connected to <DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN> of optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (TY-SB01DL) in <SLOT>, its input name is auto-reflected from [INPUT1] to [INPUT10]. If an item not reflecting input name is selected, it’s disabled.


How do I set the [DATE AND TIME]?

Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock of the projector.

Setting the time zone

1) Press ▲▼ to select [DATE AND TIME].

2) Press the <ENTER> button. The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [TIME ZONE].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch [TIME ZONE].

Note: [TIME ZONE] resets to factory default on certain initializations. Date/time based on local setting (UTC) maintained.

Setting the date and time manually

1) Select [DATE AND TIME].

2) Press <ENTER>. Screen displays.

3) Select [ADJUST CLOCK].

4) Press <ENTER>. The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.

5) Press ▲▼ to select an item, and press ◀▶ to set the local date and time.

6) Press ▲▼ to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button. Setting is completed.

Note: If time goes out of alignment right after correcting, battery replacement may be needed. Consult dealer.

Setting the date and time automatically

Projector must be connected to the network.

1) Select [DATE AND TIME].

2) Press <ENTER>. Screen displays.

3) Select [ADJUST CLOCK].

4) Press <ENTER>. Screen displays.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], and press ◀▶ to change setting to [ON].

6) Press ▲▼ to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button. Setting is completed.

Note: If NTP sync fails after setting to [ON], it returns to [OFF]. If NTP server not set, it returns to [OFF]. Access projector via web browser to set NTP server.


How do I use the [SCHEDULE] function?

Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week.

Enabling/disabling the schedule function

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SCHEDULE].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

[OFF] Disables the schedule function.
[ON] Enables the schedule function. Refer to “How to assign a program” or “How to set a program”.

How to assign a program

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SCHEDULE].

2) Press ▲▼ to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button. The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.

3) Select and assign a program to each day of week.

• Press ▲▼ to select the day of week, and press ◀▶ to select a program number (No.1 to No.7). “- – -” indicates no program set.

How to set a program

Set up to 16 commands to each program.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [SCHEDULE].

2) Press ▲▼ to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button. The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [PROGRAM EDIT].

4) Press ▲▼ to select a program number, and press the <ENTER> button.

5) Press ▲▼ to select a command number, and press the <ENTER> button. (Change page with ◀▶).

6) Press ▲▼ to select [TIME], and press the <ENTER> button. Projector in adjustment mode (time blinking).

7) Press ▲▼ to select “hour” or “minute”, and press ◀▶ or number (<0>-<9>) buttons to set time, then press <ENTER>.

8) Press ▲▼ to select [COMMAND].

9) Press the <ENTER> button. The [COMMAND] detailed screen is displayed.

10) Press ▲▼ to select a [COMMAND]. For commands needing detailed settings, items switch with ◀▶. When [INPUT] is selected, press <ENTER>, then ▲▼ to select input, then set.

[COMMAND] Detailed settings of [COMMAND] Description
[POWER ON] Switches on the projector.
[STANDBY] Enters standby.
[SHUTTER] [OPEN] Disables shutter function (opened).
[CLOSE] Enables shutter function (closed).
[INPUT] [HDMI1], [HDMI2], [DisplayPort] Switches to respective input.
[SDI [SLOT]]*1 Switches input to SDI.
[DIGITAL LINK [SLOT]]*2 Switches input to DIGITAL LINK.
[PressIT [SLOT]]*3 Switches input to PressIT.
[SLOT]*4 Switches input to SLOT.
[INPUT1] – [INPUT10]*5 Switches to DIGITAL LINK, and switches input of DIGITAL LINK output device.
See footnotes for slot board dependencies.
[OPERATING MODE]*6 [NORMAL] Prioritizes brightness.
[ECO] Prioritizes light source life.
[QUIET] Prioritizes low noise.
[USER1], [USER2], [USER3] Controls power with respective user setting.

*Footnotes describe which optional boards are needed for certain input commands to be selectable.

*6 If settings changed while using projector, luminance decrease/shortening may occur.

11) Press the <ENTER> button. Command fixed, ▶ displayed left. Press <MENU> to close detailed screen.

12) Press ▲▼ to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note: To delete set command, press <DEFAULT> on remote at step 5, or select [DELETE] at step 6. Multiple commands at same time execute by smallest command number first. Operating time is local time. Manual operations before scheduled command may prevent its execution.


How do I set up [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] for contrast and shutter synchronization?

Set the contrast synchronization function and the shutter synchronization function. Contrast sync balances contrast in multi-displays. Shutter sync synchronizes shutter operations, including fade effects. Connect projectors in a loop via <MULTI SYNC IN>/<OUT> terminals.

Note:

• Contrast and shutter sync can be used simultaneously.

• Mechanical shutter operation not included in shutter sync.

• Shutter sync works with different models, but not with single-chip DLP projectors like PT-RCQ10 series in the link.

• These menu items are same as: [PICTURE] → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [USER] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] and [DISPLAY OPTION] → [SHUTTER SETTING] → [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

Setting the contrast synchronization function

1) Press ▲▼ to select [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC].

2) Press <ENTER>. The [MULTI PROJECTOR SYNC] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [MODE].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch the item:

[OFF] Contrast and shutter sync not used.
[MAIN] Contrast or shutter sync used. Set on one projector (sync source). Calculates optimal brightness for combined screen.
[SUB] Contrast or shutter sync used. Set on all other linked projectors.

• If not [OFF], [LINK STATUS] shows connection/setting status:

[LINKED] Correctly connected and set for sync.
[NO LINK] Not correctly connected/set. Check connections/settings.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [CONTRAST MODE].

6) Press ◀▶ to switch the item:

[1] For misadjusted black level (grayish black) in dark scenes. Conventional correction by decreasing general brightness.
[2] When topical radiance needed even in dark scenes. Standard correction that doesn’t decrease brightness too much. (Factory default)

• This setting is common with [PICTURE] → [DYNAMIC CONTRAST] → [CONTRAST MODE].

7) Press ▲▼ to select [CONTRAST SYNC].

8) Press ◀▶ to switch the item ([ON] enables contrast sync, [OFF] disables).

Note for contrast sync: Operates if: daisy chain loop (max 64 projectors); one [MAIN], others [SUB]; [CONTRAST SYNC] is [ON]. [CONTRAST MODE] unifies to [1] or [2] (or just [1] if some projectors lack the menu). Can set [CONTRAST SYNC] to [OFF] for linked but non-syncing projectors.

Setting the shutter synchronization function

(This procedure is identical to setting it via the [SHUTTER SETTING] menu path, as noted in the “How do I set up the shutter synchronization function?” Q&A above. The steps involve selecting [MODE] ([MAIN]/[SUB]), checking [LINK STATUS], and setting [SHUTTER SYNC] to [ON]. Conditions and notes are also the same.)


How do I configure the [RS-232C] communication conditions and response?

Set communication conditions for <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminals.

Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL IN> terminal

1) Press ▲▼ to select [RS-232C].

2) Press <ENTER>. The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.

• Proceed to Step 5) unless optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board or other Function Board is installed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select [INPUT SELECT].

4) Press ◀▶ to switch item:

[PROJECTOR] RS-232C with <SERIAL IN> terminal.
[DIGITAL LINK] RS-232C via optional DIGITAL LINK output device and DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board.
[SLOT] Communication via Function Board by other manufacturers.

5) Press ▲▼ to select [(IN) BAUDRATE].

6) Press ◀▶ to switch item ([9600], [19200], [38400]).

7) Press ▲▼ to select [(IN) PARITY].

8) Press ◀▶ to switch item ([NONE], [EVEN], [ODD]).

Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL OUT> terminal

1) Select [RS-232C].

2) Press <ENTER>. Screen displays.

3) Select [(OUT) BAUDRATE].

4) Switch item ([9600], [19200], [38400]).

5) Select [(OUT) PARITY].

6) Switch item ([NONE], [EVEN], [ODD]).

Setting the response

1) Select [RS-232C].

2) Press <ENTER>. Screen displays.

3) Select [RESPONSE(ID ALL)].

4) Switch item ([ON] returns response for ID ALL, [OFF] does not).

5) Select [GROUP].

6) Switch item ([A] – [Z] for group ID).

7) Select [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)].

8) Switch item ([ON] returns response for group ID, [OFF] does not).

Note: If [INPUT SELECT] is [DIGITAL LINK], serial communication only if corresponding device is connected. Input speed fixed to 9600 bps, parity to NONE.


How do I set the [REMOTE2 MODE] for the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal?

You can set the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [REMOTE2 MODE].

2) Press ◀▶ to switch the item.

• The items will switch each time you press the button.

Setting Description
[DEFAULT] Uses pin assignment of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal in standard setting.
[USER] Changes the setting of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.

• Proceed to Step 3) when [USER] is selected.

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

4) Press ▲▼ to select one from [PIN2] to [PIN8], and press ◀▶ to switch the setting.


How do I set the function of the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control?

Set the function of the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [FUNCTION BUTTON].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.

3) Press ▲▼ to select a function.

Function Description
[DISABLE] Disables the <FUNCTION> button.
[SUB MEMORY] Displays the sub memory list.
[SYSTEM SELECTOR] Switches the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] setting according to input signal (SDI or other).
[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] Switches the [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] setting.
[FREEZE] Temporarily pauses the image.
[WAVEFORM MONITOR] Displays the waveform of the input signal.
[LENS MEMORY LOAD] Loads the registered lens memory.
[PROJECTION METHOD] Switches the [PROJECTION METHOD] setting.
[GEOMETRY] Switches the [GEOMETRY] setting.
[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]*1 Switches the [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] setting.

*1 PT-RZ24K/PT-RZ17K only

4) Press the <ENTER> button.

Note:

• The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen can also be displayed by holding down the <FUNCTION> button on the remote control.


How do I display the projector [STATUS]?

Display the status of the projector.

1) Press ▲▼ to select [STATUS].

2) Press the <ENTER> button.

• The [STATUS] screen is displayed.

3) Press ◀▶ to switch the pages.

• The page will change each time you press the button.

Status Item Description
[PROJECTOR TYPE] Displays the type of the projector.
[SERIAL NUMBER] Displays the serial number of the projector.
[PROJECTOR RUNTIME] Displays the runtime of the projector.
[LIGHT RUNTIME] Displays the runtime of the light source.
[CONTINUOUS LIGHTING TIME] Displays the elapsed time from when the light source is illuminated. Resets when light source is temporarily off (e.g., shutter).
[FIRMWARE VERSION] Displays the firmware version of the projector.
[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]*1 Displays the intake air temperature status.
[EXHAUST AIR TEMP.]*1 Displays the exhaust air temperature status.
[SELF TEST] Displays the self-diagnosis information.
[INPUT] Displays the currently selected input. Shows representative terminal for multi-input display.
[SIGNAL NAME] Displays the input signal name.
[MEMORY NO.] Displays the memory number of the input signal.
[BACKUP INPUT STATUS] Displays whether switching to backup input is possible when [BACKUP INPUT MODE] is [OFF].

*1 Refer to the PDF for specific temperature status indicators.


What information does the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu display?

The [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu displays various status and setting information, including:

• [NUMBER OF REGISTERED SIGNAL]: Displays the number of registered signals.

• [COOLING CONDITION]: Displays the set cooling conditions.

• [ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE]: Displays the atmospheric pressure.

• [REMOTE2 STATUS]: Displays the control status of the REMOTE2.

• [AC VOLTAGE]: Displays the input supply voltage.

• [LENS TYPE]*2: Displays the type name of the projection lens.

• [LENS ID]*2: Displays the ID set to the projection lens.

• [LENS NAME]*2: Displays the name set to the projection lens.

• [LENS THROW RATIO]*2: Displays the range of the throw ratio supported by the projection lens.

• [LENS ZOOM TYPE]*2: Displays the drive method of the zoom motor attached to the projection lens.

• [ZOOM CALIBRATION]*2: Displays the zoom calibration result ([OK]/[FAILED]) and the calibration date.

• [ON COUNT]:

• [POWER ON TIMES]: Displays the number of times the power is turned on.

• [MECHANICAL SHUTTER]: Displays the number of times the mechanical shutter is closed (counted when [MECHANICAL SHUTTER] is [ENABLE]).

• [OPERATING MODE]: Displays the setting value of [OPERATING MODE] from [PROJECTOR SETUP] → [OPERATION SETTING].

• [NORMAL]: Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [NORMAL].

• [ECO]: Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [ECO].

• [QUIET]: Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [QUIET].

• [USER1]: Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER1].

• [USER2]: Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER2].

• [USER3]: Displays the runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [USER3].

• [CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME]*3: Converts the total runtime of the light sources into the equivalent time used with the [NORMAL] setting, used for maintenance indication.

• [UPGRADE KIT]: Displays the activation status of the NFC Upgrade Kit (ET-NUK10) or the NFC function status ([ACTIVATED]/[NOT ACTIVATED]).

• [SLOT]: Displays the product model number and firmware version of the Function Board installed in .

• [SIGNAL INFORMATION]:

• [INPUT]: Displays the input used for the projected image.

• [SIGNAL FORMAT]: Displays the format of the input signal.

• [LINK]: Displays whether the input signal is single link or quad link (for SDI input).

• [2D/3D]: Displays the determination results of the 2D/3D display.

• [SIMUL]: Displays the [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING] setting and determination result if [AUTO].

• [4K DIVISION]: Displays the [4K DIVISION] setting and determination result if [AUTO].

• [SAMPLING]: Displays the sampling information and color format of the input signal.

• [BIT DEPTH]: Displays the gradation of the input signal.

• [SIGNAL LEVEL]: Displays the signal level of the input signal.

• [GAMMA]: Displays the [GAMMA] setting.

• [COLOR SPACE]: Displays the [COLOR SPACE] setting.

*2 Displayed only under specific lens/motor kit conditions. *3 Calculated using a specific formula, may contain slight error.

How is the [CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME] calculated?

The [CONSOLIDATED RUNTIME] is obtained using the following calculation formula: A x 1.0 + B x 0.8 Where:

• A: Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [NORMAL], [QUIET], [USER1], [USER2], or [USER3]

• B: Runtime of the light source with [OPERATING MODE] set to [ECO]

Values obtained by this formula contain a slight error and provide a rough indication for maintenance.

What information is shown under [DETAILED INFORMATION]?

The [DETAILED INFORMATION] screen displays the following details about the input signal:

• [INPUT]: Displays the input used for the projected image.

• [SIGNAL FORMAT]: Displays the format of the input signal.

• [SIGNAL FREQUENCY]: Displays the frequency of the input signal.

• [SCAN TYPE]: Displays the scan type of the input signal.

• [TOTAL DOTS]: Displays the total dot count of the input signal.

• [DISPLAY DOTS]: Displays the number of input signal display dots.

• [TOTAL LINES]: Displays the total line count of the input signal.

• [DISPLAY LINES]: Displays the number of input signal display lines.

• [SAMPLING]: Displays the sampling information and the color format of the input signal.

• [BIT DEPTH]: Displays the gradation of the input signal.

• [SIGNAL LEVEL]: Displays the signal level of the input signal.

• [COLORIMETRY]: Displays the color gamut information ([ITU-2020], [ITU-709], [SMPTE 170M], or [—]).

• [HDCP STATUS]: Displays the HDCP status ([HDCP2.X], [HDCP1.X], [NONE], or [—]).

• [SDI ERROR STATUS]: Displays the error status of the SDI input.


What information is shown under [CONTENT INFORMATION]?

The [CONTENT INFORMATION] screen displays the following details from the InfoFrame information added to the input signal:

• [EOTF]: Displays the Electro-Optical Transfer Function.

• [MASTERING DISPLAY COLOR VOLUME]:

• [RED]: Displays the chromaticity coordinates for the primary color red.

• [GREEN]: Displays the chromaticity coordinates for the primary color green.

• [BLUE]: Displays the chromaticity coordinates for the primary color blue.

• [WHITE]: Displays the chromaticity coordinates for the white point.

• [MAX LUMINANCE]: Displays the maximum brightness.

• [MIN LUMINANCE]: Displays the minimum brightness.

• [CONTENT LIGHT LEVEL]:

• [MaxCLL]: Displays the Maximum Content Light Level.

• [MaxFALL]: Displays the Maximum Frame Average Light Level.


How can I view [DETAILED INFORMATION] and [CONTENT INFORMATION]?

1. While displaying [SIGNAL INFORMATION] in the page 6/6 of the [STATUS] screen, press the button. 2. The [DETAILED INFORMATION] screen will be displayed. Press ▲/▼ to switch pages if multiple inputs are displayed. 3. While the [DETAILED INFORMATION] screen is displayed, press the button. 4. The [CONTENT INFORMATION] screen will be displayed. Note: Displayed items depend on the setting and the input signal.

How do I display detailed temperature or error information?

1. While the [STATUS] screen is displayed, press the button. 2. A selection screen ([ERROR INFORMATION] / [TEMPERATURE INFORMATION]) is displayed. 3. Press ▲/▼ to select either [TEMPERATURE INFORMATION] (for temperature details) or [ERROR INFORMATION] (for error details). 4. Press the button. 5. The selected detailed information screen is displayed (English only).

How do I send the projector status content via E-mail?

Before starting, ensure E-mail addresses are set in the “[E-mail set up] page”. 1. While the 1/6 to 5/6 page of the [STATUS] screen is displayed, press the button. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select [SEND E-MAIL]. 3. Press the button. The [SELECT E-MAIL ADDRESS] screen is displayed. 4. Press ▲/▼ to select the destination address. 5. Press the button. A confirmation screen is displayed. 6. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK], and press the button. The status content is sent.

How do I save the projector status content to USB memory?

Ensure a compatible USB memory is attached to the terminal. 1. While the 1/6 to 5/6 page of the [STATUS] screen is displayed, press the button. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select [SAVE TO USB MEMORY]. 3. Press the button. A confirmation screen is displayed. 4. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK], and press the button. The status content is saved.

How do I configure the Information Monitor display?

**Setting Display During Normal Status (No Operation):** 1. Press ▲/▼ to select [INFO MONITOR SETTING]. 2. Press . The [INFO MONITOR SETTING] screen is displayed. 3. Press ▲/▼ to select [DEFAULT]. 4. Press ◄/► to switch between [USER VIEW] (displays selected items) and [OFF] (does not display information). Note: Error/warning content is displayed automatically even if set to [OFF]. **Setting Items to Display ([USER VIEW]):** 1. Press ▲/▼ to select [INFO MONITOR SETTING]. 2. Press . 3. Press ▲/▼ to select [USER VIEW]. 4. Press . The [USER VIEW] screen is displayed. 5. Press ▲/▼ to select an item to configure (e.g., [INPUT], [SIGNAL NAME], [AC VOLTAGE], [INTAKE AIR TEMP.], [EXHAUST AIR TEMP.], [SHUTTER], [FREEZE], [OSD], [IP ADDRESS(WIRED)]). 6. Press ◄/► to switch the setting between [ON] (display the item) and [OFF] (do not display the item). 7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until the desired display items are set. **Setting Text Display Direction:** 1. Navigate to the [INFO MONITOR SETTING] screen. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select [DIRECTION]. 3. Press ◄/► to switch between [AUTO] (uses built-in sensor), [NORMAL] (for desk installation), and [FLIPPED] (for ceiling installation). **Setting Brightness:** 1. Navigate to the [INFO MONITOR SETTING] screen. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select [BRIGHTNESS]. 3. Press ◄/► to adjust the brightness level (30% – 100% in increments of 10).

What is the [DATA CLONING] function?

The [DATA CLONING] function allows you to copy projector settings and adjustment values to multiple projectors via LAN or using USB memory.

How do I save or load all user data settings?

**Save All User Data (Backup):** 1. Press ▲/▼ to select [SAVE ALL USER DATA]. 2. Press . The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed. 3. Enter the security password and press . A confirmation screen is displayed. 4. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK], and press . [PROGRESS] is displayed while saving. Note: Data set with “Geometric & Setup Management Software” is not included. Saved data is not deleted by [FACTORY RESET]. **Load All User Data (Restore):** 1. Press ▲/▼ to select [LOAD ALL USER DATA]. 2. Press . The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed. 3. Enter the security password and press . A confirmation screen is displayed. 4. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK], and press . Note: The projector enters standby mode to reflect the settings. Data set with “Geometric & Setup Management Software” is not included.

How do I initialize projector settings to factory defaults?

1. Press ▲/▼ to select [INITIALIZE]. 2. Press . The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed. 3. Enter the security password and press . The [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed. 4. Press ▲/▼ to select the item(s) to initialize:

• [USER SETTINGS]: Allows selective initialization of user data. Proceed to step 5 for details.

• [REGISTERED SIGNAL ONLY]: Deletes all signals registered in [SIGNAL LIST].

• [NETWORK/E-MAIL ONLY]: Returns [NETWORK] menu items and web control [Detailed set up] items to defaults (excludes Time Zone/Date/Time and certificates).

• [LOGO IMAGE ONLY]: Deletes the image registered in [USER LOGO].

• [UNIFORMITY ONLY]: Sets [DISPLAY OPTION] → [UNIFORMITY] to factory default.

• [FACTORY RESET]: Returns all user data settings to factory defaults. The projector goes into standby. (Lens ID/Name and Focus Offset settings are not reset).

5. If you selected an item other than [USER SETTINGS] in step 4, press . A confirmation screen is displayed. 6. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK], and press . **Initializing Specific Items using [USER SETTINGS]:** 1. Follow steps 1-3 above. 2. In step 4, select [USER SETTINGS] and press . The [USER SETTINGS] screen is displayed. 3. Press ▲/▼ to select an item category to initialize (e.g., [OPERATION SETTING], [STANDBY MODE], [REGISTERED SIGNAL], [NETWORK/E-MAIL], [LOGO IMAGE], [UNIFORMITY], [CONVERGENCE], [OTHER USER SETTING]). 4. Press ◄/► to switch the setting between [KEEP] (maintain current settings) and [INITIALIZE] (return to factory default). 5. Repeat steps 3-4 for all desired categories. 6. Press ▲/▼ to select [INITIALIZE] at the bottom of the list. 7. Press . A confirmation screen is displayed. 8. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK], and press .

How can the projector firmware be updated?

The firmware can be rewritten (updated) using a USB memory stick via the [FIRMWARE UPDATE] option in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu. Detailed operational steps are available elsewhere in the PDF.

What are the [SAVE LOG] and [SERVICE PASSWORD] functions used for?

Both [SAVE LOG] and [SERVICE PASSWORD] functions under the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu are intended for use by a service person.

How do I display or change test patterns?

**Displaying a Test Pattern:** 1. Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu and press . The list format screen is displayed. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select the desired test pattern ([OFF], [ALL WHITE], [ALL BLACK], [WINDOW], [WINDOW(INVERSION)], [COLOR BAR(VERTICAL)], [COLOR BAR(HORIZONTAL)], [16:9/4:3 ASPECT FRAME], [CIRCLE], [CROSS HATCH], [FOCUS], or a registered [USER TEST PATTERN 1/2/3]). 3. Press . The selected test pattern is displayed, along with the toggle selection format screen. **Switching Test Patterns:** • While a test pattern is displayed (toggle selection format screen), press ◄/► to switch to the next or previous test pattern in the list. • Pressing ◄/► while the [TEST PATTERN] menu item is selected (main menu) also switches the test pattern. **Changing Cross Hatch Color:** 1. Display the [CROSS HATCH] test pattern (steps 1-3 above). 2. Press again. The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is displayed. 3. Press ▲/▼ to select a color. 4. Press . The cross hatch color changes. (Resets to [WHITE] on power off/standby).

How do I register, delete, or rename a user test pattern?

**Registering a User Test Pattern:** 1. Save the test pattern image file (PNG or BMP format, specific resolution limits apply based on model) to a USB memory stick. 2. Insert the USB memory into the projector’s terminal. 3. Select the [TEST PATTERN] menu and press . 4. Press ▲/▼ to select [USER TEST PATTERN 1], [USER TEST PATTERN 2], or [USER TEST PATTERN 3] and press . (If already registered, the pattern displays; if not, a black screen displays). 5. Press again. The [USER TEST PATTERN] screen is displayed. 6. Press ▲/▼ to select [SAVE USER TEST PATTERN] and press . The file browser screen appears. 7. If the file is not in the root directory, press ▲/▼ to select the folder and press . Repeat until the file is displayed. 8. Press ▲/▼ to select the image file and press . A confirmation screen appears. 9. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK] and press . Registration is complete. **Deleting a Registered User Test Pattern:** 1. Navigate to the [USER TEST PATTERN] screen for the pattern to delete (steps 1-5 above). 2. Press ▲/▼ to select [DELETE USER TEST PATTERN] and press . A confirmation screen appears. 3. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK] and press . The test pattern is deleted. **Changing the Name of a Test Pattern:** 1. Navigate to the [USER TEST PATTERN] screen for the pattern to rename (steps 1-5 above). 2. Press ▲/▼ to select [RENAME USER TEST PATTERN] and press . The rename screen appears. 3. Use ▲/▼/◄/► and to enter the new name (up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters). 4. After entering the name, press ▲/▼ to select [OK] and press . The name is changed.

How do I manage registered signals in the [SIGNAL LIST] menu?

**Registering New Signals:** New signals are registered automatically when a new signal is input and the button is pressed (or if no menu is displayed). The signal is registered to the lowest available memory number (up to 96 signals/sub memories). If full, the oldest signal is overwritten. **Renaming a Registered Signal:** 1. In the [SIGNAL LIST] screen, press ▲/▼ to select the signal to rename. 2. Press . The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen appears. 3. Press again. The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen appears. 4. Press ▲/▼ to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE]. 5. Press . The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen appears. 6. Use ▲/▼/◄/► and to select/enter the new text. 7. After changing the name, press ▲/▼ to select [OK] and press . **Deleting a Registered Signal:** 1. In the [SIGNAL LIST] screen, press ▲/▼ to select the signal to delete. 2. Press the button on the remote control. The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen appears. 3. Press . The selected signal is deleted. Alternatively, deletion can be done from the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen. **Expanding Lock-in Range:** 1. Navigate to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen for the desired signal. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select [LOCK-IN RANGE]. 3. Press ◄/► to switch between [NARROW] (default) and [WIDE] (widens the range to recognize signals as the same, useful for slight frequency variations). An icon appears on the [SIGNAL LIST] screen when set to [WIDE]. **Protecting a Registered Signal:** 1. Navigate to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen for the desired signal. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select [LOCK]. 3. Press ◄/► to switch between [OFF] (not protected) and [ON] (protected). A lock icon appears on the [SIGNAL LIST] screen when set to [ON]. Protected signals cannot be deleted or adjusted.

How do I use the Sub Memory function for registered signals?

The sub memory function allows registering multiple image adjustment sets (aspect, picture quality) for the same recognized input signal. **Registering to Sub Memory:** 1. While viewing the signal (no menu displayed), press ► (or the button if assigned). The sub memory list/registration screen appears. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select the sub memory number to register. 3. Press . The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen appears (optional renaming). 4. Press ▲/▼ to select [OK] and press . The current adjustments are saved to the selected sub memory. **Switching to Sub Memory:** 1. While viewing the signal (no menu displayed), press ►. The list of registered sub memories appears. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select the desired sub memory. 3. Press . The projector switches to the adjustments saved in that sub memory. **Deleting Sub Memory:** 1. While viewing the signal (no menu displayed), press ►. The sub memory list appears. 2. Press ▲/▼ to select the sub memory to delete. 3. Press the button on the remote control. The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen appears. 4. Press . The selected sub memory is deleted.

How do I manage security settings like passwords and control device restrictions?

Access the [SECURITY] menu (Initial password: ►◄►◄). **Security Password (Startup):** 1. Select [SECURITY PASSWORD]. 2. Press ◄/► to switch between [ON] (enables password entry at startup) and [OFF] (disables). **Changing Security Password:** 1. Select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] and press . 2. Use ▲/▼/◄/► and number buttons (0-9) to set the new password (up to 8 operations). 3. Press . 4. Re-enter the password for confirmation. 5. Press . **Control Device Restrictions (Control Panel/Remote):** 1. Select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] and press . 2. Select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL] and press . 3. Select the desired restriction level:

• [ENABLE]: All buttons enabled.

• [DISABLE]: All buttons disabled (requires Control Device Password for operation).

• [USER]: Allows enabling/disabling individual buttons. Select [USER] and proceed to configure specific buttons.

4. If selecting [USER], press ▲/▼ to select a button item (e.g., [POWER BUTTON], [INPUT SELECT BUTTON], etc.). For [INPUT SELECT BUTTON], press to choose the specific input button (e.g., [HDMI1/2 BUTTON]). 5. Press ◄/► to switch the selected button between [ENABLE] and [DISABLE]. Repeat for all desired buttons. 6. After configuring, press ▲/▼ to select [APPLY] and press . 7. Select [OK] and press on the confirmation screen. **Changing Control Device Password:** 1. Select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] and press . 2. Use ▲/▼/◄/► to select text characters and press to enter the new password. 3. Select [OK] and press . (Initial password is “AAAA”).

Which specific buttons can be enabled/disabled for the Control Panel and Remote Control in [USER] mode?

The following buttons can be individually enabled or disabled when [USER] is selected under [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL] in the [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] menu:
Button Item Control Panel Buttons Remote Control Buttons
[POWER BUTTON] button, button N/A
[INPUT SELECT BUTTON] button, button, button, button button, button, button, button, button, button
[MENU BUTTON] button N/A
[LENS BUTTON] button Lens buttons (, , )
[SHUTTER BUTTON] button N/A
[ASPECT BUTTON] N/A button
[ON SCREEN BUTTON] button N/A
[OTHER BUTTON] Buttons not listed above N/A

How do I configure Network settings?

Navigate to the [NETWORK] menu. **Ethernet Path ([ETHERNET TYPE] – Requires optional DIGITAL LINK board):** 1. Select [ETHERNET TYPE] and press . 2. Select [LAN] (use standard LAN port), [DIGITAL LINK] (use DIGITAL LINK IN/LAN port), or [LAN & DIGITAL LINK] (use both). 3. Press . **DIGITAL LINK Mode ([DIGITAL LINK MODE] – Requires optional DIGITAL LINK board):** 1. Select [DIGITAL LINK] and press . 2. Select [DIGITAL LINK MODE]. 3. Press ◄/► to switch between [AUTO], [DIGITAL LINK], [LONG REACH], [ETHERNET]. **DIGITAL LINK Status ([DIGITAL LINK STATUS] – Requires optional DIGITAL LINK board):** 1. Select [DIGITAL LINK] and press . 2. Select [DIGITAL LINK STATUS] and press to view Link Status, HDCP Status, and Signal Quality. **Extron XTP ([EXTRON XTP] – Requires optional DIGITAL LINK board):** 1. Select [DIGITAL LINK] and press . 2. Select [EXTRON XTP]. 3. Press ◄/► to switch between [OFF] (for standard DIGITAL LINK devices) and [ON] (for Extron XTP transmitter). **Wired LAN Configuration ([WIRED LAN]):** 1. Select [WIRED LAN] and press . 2. Select [IP VERSION] and press . Choose [IPv4], [IPv6], or [IPv4 & IPv6] and press . Press . 3. If using IPv4: Select [IPv4 SETTINGS] and press .

• Set [DHCP] to [ON] for automatic assignment or [OFF] for manual.

• If [DHCP] is [OFF], select and enter [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], and [DEFAULT GATEWAY].

• Select [STORE] and press , then select [OK] and press .

4. If using IPv6: Select [IPv6 SETTINGS] and press .

• Set [AUTO CONFIGURATION] to [ON] or [OFF].

• Configure [TEMPORARY ADDRESS] if needed.

• If [AUTO CONFIGURATION] is [OFF], select and enter [IP ADDRESS], [PREFIX LENGTH], and [DEFAULT GATEWAY].

• Select [STORE] and press , then select [OK] and press .

**Wireless LAN Configuration ([WIRELESS LAN] – Requires optional AJ-WM50 module):** 1. Attach the Wireless Module. 2. Select [WIRELESS LAN]. 3. Press ◄/► to switch between [ENABLE] and [DISABLE]. 4. If [ENABLE], press . 5. Select [KEY] and press . 6. Enter the connection key (8-15 alphanumeric characters) and select [OK], press . 7. Select [STORE] and press , then select [OK] and press . **Projector Name ([PROJECTOR NAME]):** 1. Select [PROJECTOR NAME] and press . 2. Enter the desired name (up to 12 characters) and select [OK], press . **View Network Status ([NETWORK STATUS]):** 1. Select [NETWORK STATUS] and press . 2. Press ◄/► to switch between pages ([WIRED LAN(IPv4)], [WIRED LAN(IPv6)], [WIRELESS LAN]). **NFC Settings ([NFC SETTING] – Requires NFC function):** 1. Select [NFC SETTING] and press . 2. Select [READ/WRITE], [READ ONLY], or [OFF] and press .

What communication modes are possible with different DIGITAL LINK MODE settings?

The following table shows communication possibilities based on the [DIGITAL LINK MODE] setting when an optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board is installed:
Setting Sub-Mode Video Transfer (100 m) Video Transfer (150 m Long Reach) Ethernet RS-232C
[AUTO] For DIGITAL LINK
For long reach
For Ethernet ✔*1
[DIGITAL LINK]
[LONG REACH]
[ETHERNET] ✔*1
*1 Communication via a twisted-pair-cable transmitter is not available. Connect the projector to the network directly. Note: Max resolution/distance limits apply. Long reach supports up to 1080/60p.

How do I set up and manage the Administrator Account for network functions?

Navigate to the [NETWORK] menu → [ADMINISTRATOR ACCOUNT]. A password is required for network functions. **View Password Policy:** 1. Select [PASSWORD POLICY] and press . **Initial Setup:** 1. Select [USER NAME] and press . 2. Enter the desired administrator user name (default: “dispadmin”, up to 16 chars) and select [OK], press . 3. Select [PASSWORD] and press . 4. Enter the desired password (min 8 chars, 3 of 4 types: upper, lower, digit, symbol; cannot be blank) and select [OK], press . 5. Select [PASSWORD CONFIRM] and press . 6. Re-enter the password and select [OK], press . 7. Select [STORE] and press . 8. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen and press . **Changing Settings:** 1. Select [USER NAME] under [CURRENT] and press . Enter the current user name, select [OK], press . 2. Select [PASSWORD] under [CURRENT] and press . Enter the current password, select [OK], press . 3. Select [USER NAME] under [NEW] and press . Enter the new user name (or current name if not changing), select [OK], press . 4. Select [PASSWORD] under [NEW] and press . Enter the new password (up to 16 chars), select [OK], press . 5. Select [PASSWORD CONFIRM] under [NEW] and press . 6. Re-enter the new password, select [OK], press . 7. Select [STORE] and press . 8. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen and press .

How do I configure Network Security and Control settings?

Requires administrator account password. **Command Authentication ([COMMAND PROTECT]):** 1. Navigate to [NETWORK] → [NETWORK SECURITY]. 2. Press ◄/► to switch [COMMAND PROTECT] between [ENABLE] and [DISABLE]. 3. If enabling, a confirmation screen appears. Select [OK] and press . 4. The [COMMAND PROTECT] screen appears. 5. Select [USER NAME], press . Enter the administrator user name, select [OK], press . 6. Select [PASSWORD], press . Enter the administrator password, select [OK], press . 7. Select [OK] and press . **Network Control Services ([NETWORK CONTROL]):** 1. Navigate to [NETWORK] → [NETWORK CONTROL] and press . 2. Select an item ([WEB CONTROL], [COMMAND CONTROL], [COMMAND PORT], [Crestron Connected(TM)], [AMX D.D.]). 3. Press ◄/► to change the setting (e.g., [ON]/[OFF] or set port number). 4. Repeat for other items as needed. 5. Select [STORE] and press . 6. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen and press . **PJLink Settings ([PJLink]):** 1. Navigate to [NETWORK] → [PJLink] and press . 2. *Password:* Select [PJLink PASSWORD], press . Enter current password (if set), then set/confirm new password (up to 32 chars, blank default). Select [STORE], press , then [OK]. 3. *Control:* Select [PJLink CONTROL]. Press ◄/► to switch between [ON] and [OFF]. 4. *Notification:* Select [PJLink NOTIFICATION]. Press ◄/► to switch between [ON] and [OFF]. If [ON], proceed to set notified IP addresses (up to 2 for IPv4, 2 for IPv6).

How do I configure Art-Net settings?

Requires administrator account password and IPv4 configuration. **Art-Net Setup ([Art-Net SETUP]):** 1. Navigate to [NETWORK] → [Art-Net] and press . 2. Select [Art-Net SETUP]. 3. Press ◄/► to choose the mode: [OFF], [ON(2.X.X.X)], [ON(10.X.X.X)], or [ON(MANUAL)]. 4. If selecting [ON(MANUAL)], press . 5. Select and set [NET], [SUB NET], [UNIVERSE], [START ADDRESS] using ◄/►. 6. Select [STORE] and press . 7. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen and press . **Art-Net Channel Settings ([Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]):** 1. Navigate to [NETWORK] → [Art-Net] and press . 2. Select [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]. 3. Press ◄/► to choose a preset assignment ([1], [2], [3]) or [USER] for custom assignment. 4. If selecting [USER], press . 5. Press ▲/▼ to select a channel number. 6. Press ◄/► to select the function to assign to that channel from the list (e.g., [LIGHT OUTPUT], [LENS H SHIFT], [POWER], etc.). Alternatively, press to see the list, select an item, and press . 7. Repeat steps 5-6 for all channels to customize. (Same item cannot be set for multiple channels, except [NONE]). **View Art-Net Status ([Art-Net STATUS]):** 1. Navigate to [NETWORK] → [Art-Net] and press . 2. Select [Art-Net STATUS] and press to view channel assignments and received data.

What functions can be assigned to Art-Net channels?

When setting [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING] to [USER], the following functions can be assigned to channels:

• [LIGHT OUTPUT]: Adjusts the brightness of light source.

• [INPUT SELECT]: Switches the input.

• [LENS POSITION]: Moves the lens position.

• [LENS H SHIFT]: Adjusts the lens shift in the horizontal direction.

• [LENS V SHIFT]: Adjusts the lens shift in the vertical direction.

• [LENS FOCUS]: Adjusts the focus.

• [LENS ZOOM]: Adjusts the zoom.

• [POWER]: Controls the power status.

• [SHUTTER]: Controls the shutter.

• [FADE-IN]: Sets the fade-in time.

• [FADE-OUT]: Sets the fade-out time.

• [GEOMETRY]: Performs geometric adjustment.

• [CUSTOM MASKING]: Performs geometric adjustment using a computer.

• [FREEZE]: Freezes the projected image.

• [COLOR]: Adjusts the color saturation.

• [TINT]: Adjusts the tint.

• [RASTER PATTERN]: Displays the raster pattern.

• [LENS H SHIFT MSB]*1: Coarsely adjusts the horizontal position of the lens.

• [LENS H SHIFT LSB]*1: Finely adjusts the horizontal position of the lens.

• [LENS V SHIFT MSB]*1: Coarsely adjusts the vertical position of the lens.

• [LENS V SHIFT LSB]*1: Finely adjusts the vertical position of the lens.

• [LENS FOCUS MSB]*1: Coarsely adjusts the focus position of the lens.

• [LENS FOCUS LSB]*1: Finely adjusts the focus position of the lens.

• [LENS ZOOM MSB]*1: Coarsely adjusts the zoom position of the lens.

• [LENS ZOOM LSB]*1: Finely adjusts the zoom position of the lens.

• [ENABLE/DISABLE]: Enables/disables the control of the projector with the Art-Net function.

• [NONE]: No definition

*1 Requires specific lens/motor kit conditions. MSB and LSB items must be assigned together.

How do I connect the projector to a network?

You can connect via wired LAN or wireless LAN (requires optional module). An administrator password must be set to use network functions. **Wired LAN Connection:** 1. Connect a CAT5 or higher LAN cable (straight or crossover) from the projector’s terminal (or if using DIGITAL LINK) to your computer, network hub, or twisted-pair-cable transmitter. Use cables 100 m (328’1″) or shorter. 2. Turn on the projector. 3. Configure the projector’s [WIRED LAN] settings in the [NETWORK] menu (IP address, subnet mask, etc., either manually or via DHCP). 4. Configure the network settings on your computer according to your network administrator’s instructions. (For direct connection with factory defaults, set computer IP to 192.168.0.10, subnet 255.255.255.0, gateway 192.168.0.1). **Wireless LAN Connection (Requires AJ-WM50 Series module):** 1. Insert the Wireless Module into the projector’s terminal. 2. Turn on the projector. 3. Enable [WIRELESS LAN] in the [NETWORK] menu and set a [KEY] if needed (for direct connection). 4. View the projector’s wireless settings ([SSID], [KEY]) in the [NETWORK STATUS] screen. 5. On your computer or smartphone, perform network settings to connect to the projector’s wireless network using the displayed SSID and KEY. Alternatively, use the QR code method with compatible smartphones. **Using QR Code (Smartphones):** 1. Display the QR code:

• OSD: Navigate to [NETWORK] → [NETWORK STATUS] and display page 4/5 ([WIRELESS LAN]).

• Info Monitor: Press , select [STATUS], press , select [NETWORK], press , select [WIRELESS LAN], press , press ▲/▼ to display the QR code.

2. On your compatible smartphone (iOS 12+ / Android 8.0+ with QR reading camera app), scan the displayed QR code. 3. Tap the notification that appears on the smartphone screen and confirm connection (“Join” or “Connect”).

How do I use the Web Control function?

Ensure an administrator account is set up and [NETWORK CONTROL] → [WEB CONTROL] is set to [ON]. 1. Connect your computer to the same network as the projector. 2. Start a compatible web browser on the computer (Edge, Safari 12+, iOS Safari 12+, Android Chrome 8.0+). 3. Enter the projector’s IP address into the browser’s URL field. 4. If the administrator account is not set, the [Set up password] page appears. Enter a user name (default “dispadmin”) and password, retype the password, and click [Change]. 5. The login screen appears. Enter the user name and password for either the administrator account or a standard user account. 6. Click [Sign in] or [OK]. 7. The Projector Control Window (web interface) is displayed. Use the tabs ([Status], [Projector control], [Detailed set up], [Set up password]) to monitor and control the projector.

What are the differences between Administrator and Standard user accounts in Web Control?

The Administrator account has full access to all functions in the web control interface. The Standard user account has limited access, primarily for monitoring status and basic control. The table below shows which main functions are accessible by each account type:
Item/Page Function Administrator Standard user
[Status] [Remote preview lite] ✔*1
[Projector status]
Error information page
[Network status]
[Access error log] / [Mail error log]
[Projector control] [Basic control]
[Detail control]
[Detailed set up] [Network config]
[Adjust clock]
[Ping test]
[Certificate]
[HTTPS set up]
[Crestron Connected]
[E-mail set up]
[Authentication set up] / [User function set up] / [Status notification] / [Network security]
[Set up password] User name/Password of [Administrator]
User name/Password of [User]
Password of [PJLink]
[License]*2 License download page
*1 Only if enabled in [Detailed set up] → [User function set up]. *2 License can be downloaded even without login from the initial [Set up password] page.

How do I use the [Remote preview lite] page in Web Control?

Click [Status] → [Remote preview lite]. This page provides a simplified view and control:

• **Preview window:** Shows the current input image (with some limitations). Border color indicates status (Red: not projecting, Green: projecting).

• **[INPUT SELECT]:** Click buttons (HDMI1, HDMI2, etc.) to switch the projector’s input.

• **Status Icons:** Display current status for [STATUS] (Power), [SHUTTER], [POWER], [OSD], [GEOMETRY], [LIGHT SOURCE], [ERROR].

• **Information:** Displays [PROJECTOR TYPE], [SERIAL NUMBER], [AC VOLTAGE], Signal Information, [INTAKE AIR] temperature.

• **[Pre-Show Mode] Button:** (Appears in standby) Click to view the input image in the preview window without projecting.

• **[Detail] Button:** (Appears if error/warning) Click to go to the Error information page.


What do the status icons in the web control interface mean?

The icons represent the following states:
AreaIconMeaning
[POWER]Red power symbolThe power is switched off. (Standby status)
Green power symbolIn the projection mode
[SHUTTER]Closed shutter iconThe shutter function is enabled (shutter: closed).
Open shutter iconThe shutter function is disabled (shutter: opened).
[OSD]Menu bars iconThe on-screen display is set to on (display).
Crossed-out menu bars iconThe on-screen display is set to off (hide).
[GEOMETRY]Grid iconThe [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [OFF].
Keystone iconThe [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [KEYSTONE].
Pincushion/Corner iconThe [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [CORNER/PINCUSHION].
Curved grid iconThe [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [CURVED CORRECTION].
‘1’ iconThe [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [PC-1].
‘2’ icon / ‘3’ iconThe [POSITION] menu → [GEOMETRY] is set to [PC-2] / [PC-3].
[LIGHT SOURCE]Blue bulb iconThe light source is illuminated.
Grey bulb iconThe light source is not illuminated.
Yellow warning bulb iconThe light source is in warning status.
Red error bulb iconThe light source is in error status.
[ERROR]Yellow warning thermometer iconThe temperature is in warning status.
Red error thermometer iconThe temperature is in error status.
Yellow warning triangle iconA warning other than light source or temperature has occurred.
Red error circle iconAn error other than light source or temperature has occurred.

How do I use the [Basic control] page in Web Control?

Click [Projector control] → [Basic control]. This page offers:

• **[POWER]:** Buttons to turn power ON or enter STANDBY.

• **[SHUTTER]:** Buttons to CLOSE (enable) or OPEN (disable) the shutter.

• **[OSD]:** Buttons to turn the on-screen display ON (display) or OFF (hide).

• **[SYSTEM]:** Buttons to select the system method (e.g., NO SIGNAL).

• **On-screen display area:** Shows the projector’s current menu display (updates after control actions, not live if accessed by standard user).

• **[INPUT SELECT]:** Buttons (HDMI1, HDMI2, etc.) to switch the projector’s input.


How do I use the [Detail control] page in Web Control?

Click [Projector control] → [Detail control]. This page provides more advanced controls mirroring the remote control:

• **Remote Control Emulation:** Click buttons like MENU, DEFAULT, arrow keys, ENTER, ASPECT, number keys to operate the projector menu shown in the on-screen display area on the right.

• **[SUB MEMORY]:** Buttons to switch between sub memories.

• **[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]:** Button to toggle System Daylight View settings.

• **[FREEZE]:** Button to freeze/unfreeze the image.

• **[WAVEFORM MONITOR]:** Button to display the input signal waveform.

• **[PROJECTION METHOD]:** Button to cycle through projection methods.

• **[OSD POSITION]:** Button to change the OSD position.

• **[GEOMETRY]:** Button to access geometric adjustment settings.

• **[LENS]:** Button to access the [LENS] control page/menu.

• **[TEST PATTERN]:** Buttons to display built-in or user test patterns. Click a pattern button to project it. Click [Exit] to turn off.

• **[GET OSD]:** Button to manually update the on-screen display area on the right.


How do I manage user test patterns using the Web Control interface?

Navigate to [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [TEST PATTERN]. The [USER TEST PATTERN LIST] is displayed at the bottom right. **Registering:** 1. Click the [ADD] button corresponding to the desired user test pattern number (1, 2, or 3). A file selection dialog appears. 2. Select the test pattern image file (PNG or BMP, resolution limits apply) from your computer and click [Open]. 3. The file name appears next to the number, and registration is complete. (Overwriting requires deletion first). **Deleting:** 1. Click the [EDIT] button next to the user test pattern you want to delete. The edit options appear below. 2. Click the [DELETE] button. 3. Click [OK] in the confirmation dialog. **Renaming:** 1. Click the [EDIT] button next to the user test pattern you want to rename. The edit options appear below. 2. Enter the new name (up to 16 single-byte alphanumeric characters) in the text box. 3. Click the [RENAME] button. The name is updated in the list.

What should I do if the Temperature indicator lights or blinks red?

Check the status of the indicator and follow the corresponding solution:

Indicator status Status Solution
Lighting red • Warm-up status • Wait five minutes when the power is turned on while the temperature is low (approximately 0 °C (32 °F)).
Lighting red • Internal temperature is high (warning). • Install the projector in a location with the operating environment temperature between 0 °C (32 °F) and 45 °C (113 °F)*1.
• Remove any objects if they are blocking the intake/exhaust vents.
Blinking red (2 times) • Internal temperature is high (standby status). • Install the projector in a location with the operating environment temperature between 0 °C (32 °F) and 45 °C (113 °F)*1, and ambient humidity between 10 % and 80 % (no condensation).
Blinking red (3 times) • The cooling fan has stopped. • Turn the
switch to , and consult your dealer.

*1 The operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F) if the projector is used at an altitude between 1 400 m (4 593′) and 4 200 m (13 780′) above sea level.

Note: If the temperature indicator is still lit or blinking after taking the measures, ask your dealer for repair.


What should I do before performing maintenance on the projector?

• Make sure to turn off the power before performing the maintenance of the projector.

• When switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector”.


How do I clean the outer case of the projector?

Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.

• If the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with a dry cloth.

• Do not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may deteriorate the outer case.

• When using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.


How do I clean the lens front surface?

Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.

• Do not use a cloth that is fluffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.

• Since the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.

Attention: The lens may become damaged by hitting with a hard object or by wiping the front surface of the lens with excessive force. Handle with care.

Note: Dust may accumulate around the intake vent depending on the environment and operating condition when used in an environment with excessive dust. This may adversely affect the ventilation, cooling, and heat dissipation inside the projector, thus causing reduced brightness.


What should I check if the power does not turn on?

• Is the power plug firmly inserted into the outlet?

• Is the

switch set to ?

• Is the wall outlet supplying electricity?

• Have the circuit breakers tripped?

• Is the light source indicator or the temperature indicator lighting or blinking?


What should I check if no image appears?

• Are connections to external devices correctly performed?

• Is the image input selected correctly?

• Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum?

• Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly?

• Is the shutter function in use?

• Is the projection lens attached correctly?

• Is the lens cover still attached to the lens?


What should I check if the image is fuzzy?

• Is the lens focus set correctly?

• Is the projection distance appropriate?

• Is the lens dirty?

• Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen?


What should I check if the color is pale or grayish?

• Are [COLOR] and [TINT] adjusted correctly?

• Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly?


What should I check if the remote control does not respond?

• Are the batteries depleted?

• Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly?

• Is the button operation disabled by sliding the button on the remote control?

• Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver of the projector?

• Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range?

• Are other forms of light, such as fluorescent light, affecting the projection?

• Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to [DISABLE]?

• Is the terminal used for contact control?

• Is the ID number setting operation correct?


What should I check if the menu screen does not appear?

• Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)?


What should I check if the buttons on the control panel do not operate?

• Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to [DISABLE]?

• Is the terminal used for contact control?


What should I check if the image does not display correctly?

• Is the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] selection set correctly?

• Is there a problem with the external device to output images?

• Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?

• Are the settings for [HDMI IN], [DisplayPort IN], and [SLOT IN] made correctly?

• Is the cable too long?


What should I check if the image from a computer does not appear?

• Is the external video output on the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The external output settings may be switched by pressing the “Fn” + “F3” or “Fn” + “F10” simultaneously. Since the method varies depending on the computer type, refer to the user manual provided with your computer.)


What should I check if the image from an HDMI compatible device does not appear or is disrupted?

• Is the HDMI cable connected securely?

• Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on.

• Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?


What should I check if the image output from the DisplayPort of the computer does not appear?

• If connecting the projector to a computer that uses an early-type chipset or graphics card compatible with DisplayPort, the projector or computer may not be operated properly.

• The graphics accelerator driver of the computer may need to be updated to the latest version.

• Turn the power of the projector and the external device off and on.

• Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?


What should I check if the lens shift cannot be adjusted?

• Perform [LENS CALIBRATION].

• Is the Fixed-focus Lens (Model No.: ET-D3LEW50, ET-D75LE50) attached?


What should I check if geometric adjustment is not possible?

• Is [QUAD PIXEL DRIVE] set to [OFF]? (PT-RQ25K and PT-RQ18K only)


What should I check if I cannot control the projector with Art-Net?

• Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and an external device, and between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and projector correctly done?

• Is [Art-Net SETUP] set to other than [OFF]?

• Are [NET], [SUB NET], [UNIVERSE], and [START ADDRESS] set correctly?


What should I check if the DIGITAL LINK input image is not displayed?

• Is the cable compatible to the condition of the projector used?

• Are the connections between the twisted-pair-cable transmitter and the projector or an external device correctly done?

• Is [DIGITAL LINK MODE] set to [AUTO], [DIGITAL LINK], or [LONG REACH]? Is it set to [ETHERNET]?

• Is a signal which is not compatible with a twisted-pair-cable transmitter being input?


What should I check if I cannot switch to the input of the Function Board?

• Is the Function Board correctly installed in the slot?


What should I check if the operation noise became loud?

If the temperature inside the projector becomes high, the speed of the internal cooling fan increases automatically and the operation noise becomes loud. If the internal temperature reaches the abnormal value, the indicators will light up or blink.

• Is the ambient temperature high?

• Are the intake/exhaust vents blocked?


What should I do if problems persist after troubleshooting?

• If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.


What do the self-diagnosis alphanumeric symbols mean and what action should I take?

The content of an error or warning is automatically displayed in the information monitor at the side of the projector when it occurs. The following list shows the alphanumeric symbol displayed, its content, and the required action number. Follow the measure corresponding to the action number.

Error/Warning Symbols and Content:

Error/warning alphanumeric symbol Error/warning alphanumeric symbol content Action number
U081 Low AC voltage warning (below 90 V) 4
U084 USB power supply error 7
U090 Projection lens not attached 5
U200 Intake air temperature warning 1
U201 Exhaust air temperature warning 2
U202 – U258 Other high temperature warnings 1
U280 Low temperature warning 3
U300 Intake air temperature error 1
U301 Exhaust air temperature error 2
U302 – U358 Other high temperature errors 1
U380 Low temperature error 3
U510, U511 Function Board power supply error 9
F011 Shutter error 7
F015 Luminance sensor error 7
F016 Angle sensor error 7
F017 QUAD PIXEL DRIVE error 7
F018 Air pressure sensor error 7
F061 – F063 Light source driver communication error 7
F096 Lens mounter error 7
F098 Lens EEPROM error 8
F110, F111 Phosphor wheel error 7
F400 – F455 Light source error 7
F200 – F212 Fan warning 7
F250 – F255 Liquid cooling pump warning 7
F300 – F312 Fan error 7
F350 – F355 Liquid cooling pump error 7
F510 – F516 Circuit board power supply error 7
H001 Battery replacement for the internal clock 6
H011 – H029 Temperature sensor error 7

Measure for Error and Warning:

Action number Measure
1 The operating environment temperature is too high. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature*1.
2 The operating environment temperature is too high, or the exhaust vent may be blocked. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature*1. Or remove any objects that are blocking the exhaust vent.
3 The operating environment temperature is too low. Use the projector in an appropriate operating environment temperature*1.
4 The input supply voltage is low. Use electric wiring that can sufficiently withstand the power consumption of the projector.
5 The projection lens cannot be detected. Turn off the power and attach the projection lens again. If the display does not clear after switching the power off and on, consult your dealer.
6 Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.
7 If the display does not clear after switching the main power off and on, consult your dealer.
8 The projection lens information cannot be acquired. If the display does not clear after switching the power off and on, consult your dealer.
9 There is an error in the Function Board power supply. Replace the Function Board.

*1 For the operating environment temperature of the projector, refer to “Operating environment”.

Note:

• The displayed error/warning symbol may differ from the actual defect.

• For errors and warnings that are not described in the table, consult your dealer.


How can I use the PJLink function?

The network function of this projector supports PJLink class 1 and class 2, allowing projector setting or status querying from a computer using the PJLink protocol.

Note: To use the PJLink function, you must set the password of the administrator account.

Supported PJLink Commands:

ClassCommandControl detailsParameter/response stringRemark
1POWRPower supply control0Standby
1Power on
1POWR ?Power supply status query0Standby
1Power on
2Preparing for switching off the projector
1INPTInput selection31HDMI1
32HDMI2
33DisplayPort
INPT ?Input selection query34SDI*1/DIGITAL LINK*2/PressIT*3/SLOT*4
2INPTInput selection31HDMI1
32HDMI2
33DisplayPort
INPT ?Input selection query34SDI*1/DIGITAL LINK*2/PressIT*3/SLOT*4
1AVMTShutter control30Shutter function disabled (shutter: opened)
AVMT ?Shutter status query31Shutter function enabled (shutter: closed)
1ERST ?Error status query1st byteIndicates fan errors, and returns 0 – 2. (0=No error, 1=Warning, 2=Error)
2nd byteIndicates light source errors, and returns 0 or 2.
3rd byteIndicates temperature errors, and returns 0 – 2.
4th byteReturns 0.
5th byteReturns 0.
6th byteIndicates other errors, and returns 0 – 2.
1LAMP ?Light source status queryAAAA XAAAA: Light source runtime; X: 0=Light source off, 1=Light source on
1INST ?Input selection list query31 32 33 34
231 32 33 34
1NAME ?Projector name queryXXXXXReturns the name set in the [NETWORK] menu → [PROJECTOR NAME].
1INF1 ?Manufacturer name queryPanasonicReturns manufacturer name.
1INF2 ?Model name queryPT-RQ25K PT-RQ18K PT-RZ24K PT-RZ17KReturns model name.
1INFO ?Other information queriesXXXXXReturns information such as version number.
1CLSS ?Class information query2Returns class for PJLink.
2SNUM ?Serial number queryXXXXXXXXXReturns serial number.
2SVER ?Software version queryXXXXXXXXXReturns firmware version information.
2INNM ?Input terminal name query31 / HDMI1
32 / HDMI2
33 / DISPLAYPORT
34 / SDI[SLOT]Input name of the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) installed in
34 / DIGITAL LINK[SLOT]Input name of the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) installed in
34 / PressIT[SLOT]Input name of the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) installed in
34 / SLOTInput name of the Function Board by other manufacturers installed in
2IRES ?Input signal resolution queryAAAAxBBBBAAAA: Horizontal resolution; BBBB: Vertical resolution
2RRES ?Recommended resolution query3840×2400When using PT-RQ25K/PT-RQ18K and [QUAD PIXEL DRIVE] is set to [ON]
1920×1200When using PT-RQ25K/PT-RQ18K and [QUAD PIXEL DRIVE] is set to [OFF]; PT-RZ24K/PT-RZ17K
2FREZFreeze control0Freeze clear
FREZ ?Freeze status query1Freeze (stop)
2POWRCooling notification0Notifies when the power is turned off.
Warmup notification1Notifies when the power is turned on.
2ERSTError notificationXXXXXXNotifies when an error occurs.
2LKUPLink up notificationXX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XXNotifies the MAC address when the PJLink communication becomes possible.
2INPTInput switch completion notification31HDMI1
32HDMI2
33DisplayPort
34SDI*1/DIGITAL LINK*2/PressIT*3/SLOT*4
2SRCHProjector searchACKN=xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xxThe projector connected to the same network that can communicate with PJLink will respond with its MAC address.

*1 When the optional 12G-SDI Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01QS) is installed in

*2 When the optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board (Model No.: TY-SB01DL) is installed in

*3 When the optional Wireless Presentation System Receiver Board (Model No.: TY-SB01WP) is installed in

*4 When the Function Board by other manufacturers is installed in

PJLink Security Authentication:

A PJLink password for security authentication is required. Set the password in the [NETWORK] menu → [PJLink] → [PJLink PASSWORD], or via the web control screen.

To communicate without authentication, set the PJLink password as blank (factory default).

For detailed PJLink specifications, visit the Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association website: https://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/


How can I control the projector using Art-Net?

The projector’s network function supports Art-Net, allowing control via DMX controllers and application software using the Art-Net protocol.

Note:

• Administrator account password is required.

• Art-Net requires IPv4. Set [NETWORK] menu → [WIRED LAN] → [IP VERSION] to [IPv4] or [IPv4 & IPv6] and assign an IPv4 address.

Channel Definition:

Channel settings ([1], [2], [3], [USER]) can be switched via [NETWORK] menu → [Art-Net] → [Art-Net CHANNEL SETTING]. [USER] is the factory default and is assignable.

Control Details by Channel Setting:

Control details[1][2][3][USER]
LIGHT OUTPUT
INPUT SELECT
LENS FUNCTION SELECT
LENS CONTROL
LENS POSITION
LENS H SHIFT
LENS V SHIFT
LENS FOCUS✔*1
LENS ZOOM✔*1
POWER
SHUTTER
FADE-IN
FADE-OUT
GEOMETRY
CUSTOM MASKING
FREEZE
COLOR
TINT
RASTER PATTERN
LENS H SHIFT MSB✔*1
LENS H SHIFT LSB✔*1
LENS V SHIFT MSB✔*1
LENS V SHIFT LSB✔*1
LENS FOCUS MSB✔*1
LENS FOCUS LSB✔*1
LENS ZOOM MSB✔*1
LENS ZOOM LSB✔*1
ENABLE/DISABLE

*1 These items can be controlled when the standard DC motor unit in specific Zoom Lenses (ET-D75LE6/8/10/20/30/40) is replaced with the stepping motor unit (ET-D75MKS10), or when a lens with a stepping motor is attached.

Control Details (Examples):

LIGHT OUTPUT: Set in 256 steps (0 = 100%, 255 = 0%). Default: 0.

INPUT SELECT (when setting is [1]): HDMI1 (40-47). Default: 0.

INPUT SELECT (when setting is other than [1]): HDMI1 (32-39), HDMI2 (40-47), DisplayPort (48-55), SLOT* (80-87). Default: 0. (*SLOT input depends on the installed optional board: SDI, DIGITAL LINK, PressIT, or other).

LENS FUNCTION SELECT: Selects function (H Shift, V Shift, Focus, Zoom, Home, Memory Load) to be operated by LENS CONTROL.

LENS CONTROL: Adjusts selected lens function (- High/Low/Fine speed, Stop, + Fine/Low/High speed). Default: 100 (Stop).

LENS POSITION: Moves lens to Home or loads Lens Memory 1-10.

LENS H SHIFT, V SHIFT, FOCUS, ZOOM (Direct Control): Adjusts lens (- High/Low/Fine speed, Stop, + Fine/Low/High speed). Default: 128 (Stop).

POWER: Power on (192-255). Default: 128 (No operation).

SHUTTER: Open (0-63), Closed (192-255). Default: 128 (No operation).

FADE-IN, FADE-OUT: Sets fade time (0.5s to 10.0s). Default: 255 (OFF).

GEOMETRY: Selects correction type (KEYSTONE, CURVED, PC1-3, CORNER/PINCUSHION). Default: 255 (OFF).

CUSTOM MASKING: Selects mask pattern (PC1-3). Default: 255 (OFF).

FREEZE: ON (160-223), OFF (32-95). Default: 128 (No operation).

COLOR, TINT: Adjusts value (-31 to +31). Default: 0 (Factory default setting at 64).

RASTER PATTERN: Selects pattern (WHITE, YELLOW, CYAN, GREEN, MAGENTA, RED, BLUE, BLACK, USER LOGO). Default: 0 (OFF).

LENS H/V SHIFT/FOCUS/ZOOM MSB: Coarse adjustment (16-255). Default: 0.

LENS H/V SHIFT/FOCUS/ZOOM LSB: Fine adjustment (16-255). Default: 0.

ENABLE/DISABLE: Disable (0-127), Enable (128-255). Default: 0 (Enable). Disables/Enables control for all channels.


How do I control the projector via LAN using control commands?

The projector can be controlled via the terminal or the terminal (with optional board TY-SB01DL) using the command format.

Note: Administrator account password is required.

Connecting in Protect Mode ([COMMAND PROTECT] set to [ENABLE]):

1. Obtain the projector’s IP address and port number (Default: 1024) from the [NETWORK] menu ([NETWORK STATUS] and [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT]). Request a connection.

2. Check the response from the projector. Example: “NTCONTROL 1 23181e1e” (CR). (‘1’ indicates Protect mode, ‘23181e1e’ is an 8-byte random number).

3. Generate a 32-byte MD5 hash value from: “admin_username:admin_password:random_number”. (Replace with actual admin username, password, and the received random number).

4. Transmit the command: Hash value + ‘0’ + ‘0’ + Control command string + (CR). Example (Power query): “dbdd…fa6400QPW” (CR).

5. Receive the response: ‘0’ + ‘0’ + Response string + (CR). Example (Powered on): “00001” (CR).

6. Error response format: Error code string + (CR). Example: “ERR1” (CR).

Error Codes: ERR1 (Undefined command), ERR2 (Out of parameter range), ERR3 (Busy/No-acceptable period), ERR4 (Timeout/No-acceptable period), ERR5 (Wrong data length), ERRA (Password mismatch).

Connecting in Non-Protect Mode ([COMMAND PROTECT] set to [DISABLE]):

1. Obtain IP address and port number (Default: 1024). Request a connection.

2. Check the response: “NTCONTROL 0” (CR). (‘0’ indicates Non-protect mode).

3. Transmit the command: ‘0’ + ‘0’ + Control command string + (CR). Example (Power query): “00QPW” (CR).

4. Receive the response: ‘0’ + ‘0’ + Response string + (CR). Example (Standby): “00000” (CR).

5. Error response format: Error code string + (CR). Example: “ERR1” (CR).

Error Codes: ERR1 (Undefined command), ERR2 (Out of parameter range), ERR3 (Busy/No-acceptable period), ERR4 (Timeout/No-acceptable period), ERR5 (Wrong data length).

Note on Communication Flow: The projector automatically disconnects after each command response for security. You must re-establish the connection for each new command.


How do I connect the projector to a computer using the RS-232C (/) terminal?

The / terminals conform to RS-232C for computer control.

Single Projector Connection:

• Connect the computer’s serial port to the projector’s (D-Sub 9p female) terminal using a straight-through serial cable.

Multiple Projectors Connection:

1. Connect the computer’s serial port to the first projector’s terminal using a straight-through serial cable.

2. Connect the first projector’s (D-Sub 9p male) terminal to the second projector’s terminal using a straight-through serial cable.

3. Continue daisy-chaining projectors using to .

Connection via DIGITAL LINK Compatible Device:

• Connect the DIGITAL LINK compatible device’s serial port to the projector’s (D-Sub 9p female) terminal using a straight-through serial cable. (Requires optional DIGITAL LINK Terminal Board TY-SB01DL in the projector slot).

Note: Set the destination of [RS-232C] in the menu according to the connection method.

Pin Assignments (D-Sub 9-pin Female – Projector ):

Pin No.Signal nameDetails
(1)NC
(2)TXDTransmitted data
(3)RXDReceived data
(4)NC
(5)GNDEarth
(6)NC
(7)CTSConnected internally
(8)RTSConnected internally
(9)NC

Pin Assignments (D-Sub 9-pin Male – Projector ):

Pin No.Signal nameDetails
(1)NC
(2)RXDReceived data
(3)TXDTransmitted data
(4)NC
(5)GNDEarth
(6)NC
(7)RTSConnected internally
(8)CTSConnected internally
(9)NC

What are the RS-232C communication conditions and command format?

Communication Conditions (Factory Default):

Signal levelRS-232C-compliant
Sync. methodAsynchronous
Baud rate9 600 bps
ParityNone
Character length8 bits
Stop bit1 bit
X parameterNone
S parameterNone

Basic Command Format:

STX (0x02) + AD + ID (2 chars) + ; + Command (3 chars) + : + Parameter (variable length) + ETX (0x03)

ID: ZZ (All), 01-64 (Individual), 0A-0Z (Group)

; (Semi-colon): Separates ID from command.

: (Colon): Separates command from parameter. Not required if no parameter.

Basic Format (with Subcommands):

STX + AD + ID + ; + Command + : + Subcommand (5 chars) + E + Parameter (6 bytes: +/- sign + 5 value digits) + ETX

E (Operation): ‘=’ (Set value). Operation (E) and Parameter are not needed for commands without parameters.

Attention/Notes:

• Allow 60 seconds after light source starts lighting before sending commands.

• Wait 0.5 seconds after receiving a response before sending the next command.

• “ER401” response if command cannot be executed.

• “ER402” response for invalid parameters.

• Responses are sent only if ID matches projector ID, or if ID is ALL/[GROUP] and corresponding [RESPONSE(ID ALL)]/[RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is [ON].


How do I control multiple projectors via RS-232C?

To control all projectors simultaneously:

1. Set a different ID (01-64) for each projector.

2. Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector.

3. Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [OFF] for all other projectors.

Use ID “ZZ” in your commands.

To control multiple projectors by group:

1. Set a different ID (01-64) for each projector.

2. Set the same [GROUP] setting (0A-0Z) for projectors within the same group.

3. Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector within each group.

4. Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [OFF] for all other projectors in that group.

Use the group ID (e.g., “0A”) in your commands.

Note: Incorrect responses occur if [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] or [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is set to [ON] in multiple projectors (for the same group).

Cable Specification: Use standard straight-through RS-232C cables for connections between computer and projector 1 (), and between projectors ( to ).


What are some example RS-232C commands?

Projector Control Commands:

CommandDetailsParameter/ResponseRemark
PONPower on
POFPower standby
QPWPower query000 / 001000=STANDBY, 001=Power on
IISSwitching the input signalHD1/HD2/DP1/DM1,SD1*1/DM1,DL1*2/DM1,WP1*3/DM1,TP1*4HDMI1/HDMI2/DisplayPort/SDI/DIGITAL LINK/PressIT/SLOT
OSHShutter control0 / 10=Opened, 1=Closed
QSHShutter status query0 / 10=Opened, 1=Closed
VSEAspect ratio switch0/1/2/5/6/9/10DEFAULT/4:3/16:9/THROUGH/HV FIT/H FIT/V FIT
QSEAspect ratio settings query(Response is same as VSE parameter)
OCSSub memory switch01 – 96Sub memory number
QSBSub memory status query(Response is same as OCS parameter)

*1 Optional 12G-SDI Board (TY-SB01QS) needed.

*2 Optional DIGITAL LINK Board (TY-SB01DL) needed.

*3 Optional Wireless Receiver Board (TY-SB01WP) needed.

*4 Function Board by other manufacturers needed.

Lens Control Commands (Example using VXX command with subcommand):

CommandSub commandDetailsRemark (Parameter format: E P)
VXXLNS12Lens H shiftE: ‘=’, P: +/- sign + 5 digits (+00000=Fine adj 1+, +00001=Fine adj 1-, +00100=Fine adj 2+, +00101=Fine adj 2-, +00200=Coarse adj+, +00201=Coarse adj-)
VXXLNS13Lens V shift(Same parameter format as LNS12)
VXXLNS14Lens focus(Same parameter format as LNS12)
VXXLNS15Lens zoom(Same parameter format as LNS12)

How can I use the terminal for remote control?

The terminal (D-Sub 9p female) allows remote control (by contact closure) from a control board located away from the projector, where standard remote signals might not reach.

Pin Assignments and Function (Short to Pin 1 GND):

Pin No.Signal nameOpen (H)Short (L)
(1)GNDGND
(2)POWEROFFON
(3)HDMI1OtherHDMI1
(4)HDMI2OtherHDMI2
(5)DisplayPortDisplayPort
(6)None
(7)None
(8)SHUTTEROFFON
(9)ENABLE / DISABLEControlled by remote controlControlled by external contact

Attention:

• For control, ensure Pin 1 (GND) and Pin 9 (ENABLE/DISABLE) are short-circuited.

• When Pin 1 and 9 are shorted, the POWER ON/STANDBY and SHUTTER buttons on the control panel/remote are disabled (as are corresponding RS-232C/network commands).

• When Pin 1 and 9 are shorted, and any Pin from (3) to (7) is shorted to Pin 1, the POWER ON/STANDBY, input selection (HDMI, DP, SDI, DIGITAL LINK, SLOT, INPUT MENU), and SHUTTER buttons are disabled (as are corresponding RS-232C/network commands).

Note: Pin functions (2-8) can be changed by setting [REMOTE2 MODE] to [USER].


How do I operate the Information Monitor?

The information monitor on the control panel displays projector status and allows setting changes.

Screen Modes:

Hide mode: Default mode during no operation, shows no information. Set via [SETUP] → [INFO MONITOR] → [DEFAULT] → [OFF].

USER VIEW mode: Constantly displays selected basic information. Set via [SETUP] → [INFO MONITOR] → [DEFAULT] → [USER VIEW]. Up to four items displayed simultaneously (cycles if more are selected).

Menu operation mode: Activated by pressing button. Allows navigation of menus.

Error notification mode: Automatically displays error/warning symbols when they occur.

Basic Operation Procedure (Menu Operation Mode):

1. Press the button on the control panel. The top menu ([USER VIEW], [SETUP], [STATUS]) appears.

2. Press ▲/▼ to select a top menu item (inverted display).

3. Press the button. The sub-menu for the selected item appears.

4. Press ▲/▼ to select a sub-menu item, and press . The setting screen appears.

5. Press ◄/► to change the setting.

Note: Pressing returns to the previous menu. The monitor reverts to Hide/USER VIEW mode after approx. 60 seconds of inactivity.

[USER VIEW] Menu:

1. Select [USER VIEW] from the top menu and press .

2. Press ▲/▼ to cycle through the displayed information pages.

Items displayed depend on settings in [SETUP] → [INFO MONITOR]. Examples: [INPUT], [SIGNAL NAME], [AC VOLTAGE], [INTAKE AIR TEMP.], [EXHAUST AIR TEMP.], [SHUTTER], [FREEZE], [OSD], [IP ADDRESS(WIRED)].

[SETUP] Menu:

Contains sub-menus: [PROJECTOR], [INFO MONITOR], [NETWORK].

Allows setting Projector ID, Firmware Update, Save Log, Info Monitor Display Items/Default/Direction/Brightness, Network Settings (IP Version, IPv4/IPv6 Address, Wireless LAN enable).

[STATUS] Menu:

Contains sub-menus: [PROJECTOR], [INFO MONITOR], [NETWORK], [VERSION].

Displays current status information like Projector ID/Type/Serial/Runtime, Light Runtime, Temperatures, Self Test results, Input/Signal Name, Display Status (OSD, Shutter, Freeze), Remote2 Status, AC Voltage, Operating Mode, Light Output Levels, Info Monitor Settings, Network Status (Wired/Wireless IP/Subnet/MAC/DHCP/Auto Config etc.), Firmware Version.

Error Notification Mode:

1. When an error/warning occurs (e.g., U200 [TEMP.]), the symbol is displayed.

2. Press . The corresponding [SELF TEST] status screen appears (e.g., SELF TEST WARNING).

3. Press . The error/warning details are displayed (e.g., Intake air temp. warning).

4. Press to return to the [SELF TEST] screen.


How do I use the data cloning function?

This function copies projector settings and adjustment values to multiple projectors (of the same model) via LAN or USB memory.

Data That Cannot Be Copied:

• Projector ID, Date/Time, LAN Write Protect setting, Security Password, Control Device Password, Wired/Wireless LAN settings, Projector Name, Network Security settings, Web control passwords (admin/user), CRT key/certificate info, E-mail setup, Authentication setup, Crestron Connected settings.

Supported Device (USB):

• Commercially available USB memory (no security function).

• FAT16 or FAT32 format only.

• Single partition structure only.

Copying Data via LAN:

1. Preparation (Destination Projectors): Set [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [DATA CLONING] → [LAN] → [WRITE PROTECT] → [OFF]. Administrator password is required for network functions.

2. Connect all projectors to a switching hub using LAN cables.

3. Turn on all projectors.

4. On the Source Projector: Navigate to [DATA CLONING] menu.

5. Enter the security password and press .

6. Select [LAN] and press .

7. Select [SELECT PROJECTOR] and press . A list of networked projectors appears.

8. Use ▲/▼ to highlight a destination projector and press to select it. Repeat to select multiple projectors.

9. Press the button on the remote.

10. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen and press .

11. Copying starts. Destination projectors enter standby. Results (Green=Success, Red=Fail) are shown on the source projector’s list.

12. Turn on the destination projector(s). Copied content is reflected.

Note: Security password default is ▲▼◄►▲. Indicators blink on destination projectors during copy.

Copying Projector Data to USB Memory:

1. Insert USB memory into the source projector’s terminal.

2. Navigate to [DATA CLONING] menu.

3. Enter security password and press .

4. Select [USB MEMORY] and press .

5. Select [PROJECTOR -> USB MEMORY] and press .

6. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen and press .

7. Copying starts. “[Data copy finished.]” is displayed upon completion.

8. Disconnect the USB memory.

Copying Data from USB Memory to Projector:

1. Insert USB memory into the destination projector’s terminal.

2. Navigate to [DATA CLONING] menu.

3. Enter security password and press .

4. Select [USB MEMORY] and press .

5. Select [USB MEMORY -> PROJECTOR] and press .

6. Select [OK] on the confirmation screen and press .

7. Projector enters standby and copying starts. Indicators blink.

8. Once copying is completed (indicators stop blinking), disconnect the USB memory.

9. Turn on the projector. Copied content is reflected.


How do I update the projector firmware?

Firmware can be updated via LAN or USB memory. Download the latest firmware from the Panasonic Professional Display and Projector Technical Support Website (PASS registration required): https://panasonic.net/cns/projector/pass/

Confirming Current Firmware Version:

• Press the button on the remote control, or navigate to [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS]. Check the [FIRMWARE VERSION].

Updating Firmware via LAN:

1. Preparation:

• Connect the projector and a computer (Windows 11/10/8.1 with LAN port) to the same network using appropriate LAN cables (CAT5e or higher, shielded, straight-through, single wire for projector-transmitter connection).

• Ensure projector’s network settings ([COMMAND PORT], [IP ADDRESS], etc.) and computer’s network settings allow connection.

• Confirm projector’s administrator [User name] and [Password].

• Download the correct firmware update tool (e.g., FirmUpdateTool_RQ25K_101.exe) from the PASS website.

• Extract the downloaded zip file to get the executable update tool.

• Disable computer’s security software/firewalls that might interfere.

2. Execution:

• Set the projector to Standby mode.

• Double-click the firmware update tool executable file on the computer.

• Confirm the projector is in standby and connected to LAN. Click [Next].

• Read and accept the Software License Agreement. Click [I accept], then [Next].

• Enter the projector’s [IP Address], [Command Port], administrator [User Name], and [Password]. Click [Next].

• Confirm the current and new firmware versions on the confirmation screen. Click [Start].

• Update begins. Projector indicators (, ) blink red alternately. Progress is shown on the computer screen (approx. 20 mins).

• Once “Firmware update is completed.” appears, click [No] (unless updating another projector).

• Turn on the projector and confirm the updated firmware version in the [STATUS] screen.

Updating Firmware using USB Memory (via OSD):

1. Preparation:

• Download the correct firmware zip file (e.g., RQ25K_USER_101.zip) from the PASS website.

• Extract the zip file to get the firmware data file (e.g., RQ25K_USER_101.rom).

• Format a USB memory stick (FAT16/FAT32, single partition, no security).

• Copy ONLY the firmware data file (.rom) to the root directory of the USB memory.

2. Execution (OSD):

• Turn on the projector.

• Insert the prepared USB memory into the projector’s terminal.

• Press

, select [PROJECTOR SETUP], press .

• Select [FIRMWARE UPDATE], press .

• Enter the security password (default: ▲▼◄►▲) and press .

• Select [OK] on the confirmation screen and press .

• Update starts, projector enters standby, indicators blink red alternately.

• Update completes when indicators stop blinking and turn off.

• Turn on the projector and confirm the updated firmware version.

Updating Firmware using USB Memory (via Information Monitor – Standby Mode):

1. Preparation: Same as USB update preparation above.

2. Execution (Info Monitor):

• Ensure projector is in standby mode.

• Insert the prepared USB memory into the projector’s terminal.

• Press on the control panel.

• Select [SETUP] using ▲/▼, press .

• Select [PROJECTOR] using ▲/▼, press .

• Select [FIRMWARE UPDATE] using ▲/▼, press .

• Enter the security password using ◄/►/▲/▼ and press .

• The confirmation screen appears (can press ► to view new version, ◄ to return).

• Press to start the update.

• Update starts, progress shown on info monitor, indicators blink red alternately.

• “[FIRMWARE UPDATE COMPLETE]” is displayed on completion.

Attention: Do not turn off the main power or disconnect LAN/USB during the update process.

Note: If an update fails or takes >60 minutes, power cycle the projector and retry. If power fails during update, it will restart automatically upon power restoration.


What should I do if the Light source indicator lights or blinks red?

Check the status of the indicator and follow the corresponding solution:

Indicator status Status Solution
Lighting red • Some of the elements of the light source are defective and the light output has decreased. • Turn the
switch to , and turn on the power again.
Blinking red (1 time) • The light source is turned off since the projection lens cannot be detected. • Turn off the power and mount the projection lens again.
• Turn the
switch to , and turn on the power again.
Blinking red (2 times)
Blinking red (3 times)
• The light source does not light up, or the light source turns off while the projector is in use. • Turn the
switch to , and turn on the power again.

Note:

• If the light source indicator is still lighting or blinking after taking the measures, set the

switch to , and ask your dealer for repairs.

• The light source indicator will light up in green if the projector is in projection mode and there is no indication of problem by lighting or blinking in red.


How do I use the web control function to manage the lens?

Navigate to [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS].

Controls:

[CALIBRATION] (1): Opens the calibration execution page.

[SET POSITION] (2): Opens the lens position setting page.

[HOME POSITION] (3): Moves the lens to the home position.

Slider bar (4): Adjusts lens shift, zoom, and focus by dragging the slider. Speed increases further from the center.

Adjustment buttons (5): Click ▲/▼/◄/► to adjust shift, zoom, focus.

[FOCUS] (6): Adjust focus using slider or ▲/▼ buttons. Fine adjustment with ◄/►.

[ZOOM] (7): Adjust zoom using slider or ▲/▼ buttons. Fine adjustment with ◄/►.

[SHIFT] (8): Adjust vertical/horizontal shift using slider or ▲/▼/◄/► buttons. Fine adjustment available (hold button for >3s for faster adjustment).

[SAVE] (9): Saves the current lens position to a selected lens memory number.

[LOAD] (10): Loads a saved lens position from a specified lens memory number.

[Back] (11): Returns to the [Detail control] page.


How do I perform lens calibration using the web control function?

For Zoom Lens with Stepping Motor:

1. Go to [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS] → [CALIBRATION].

2. Select the calibration target:

• [SHIFT/FOCUS/ZOOM] (1): Calibrates shift, focus, and zoom.

• [SHIFT/FOCUS] (2): Calibrates shift and focus.

• [ZOOM] (3): Calibrates zoom adjustment range.

3. Click [CALIBRATION] (5).

4. A confirmation screen appears. Click [OK].

5. Calibration starts.

For Zoom Lens with DC motor or Fixed-focus Lens:

1. Go to [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS] → [CALIBRATION].

2. A confirmation screen appears. Click [OK].

3. Calibrations for lens shift and focus start.


How do I manually set the lens position using the web control function?

1. Go to [Projector control] → [Detail control] → [LENS] → [SET POSITION].

2. Click [Get] (1) to acquire the current lens position values (Vertical, Horizontal, Focus, Zoom*) and display them.

3. Enter the desired numerical values into the Lens position information fields (2).

4. Click [Apply] (4) to move the lens to the entered position.

5. Click [Back] (3) to return to the [LENS] page.

Note: *Zoom position is only displayed/settable if the lens has a stepping motor (either original or via Stepping Motor Kit ET-D75MKS10 for specific lenses).


How do I configure network settings using the web control function?

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [Network config].

2. A caution screen appears. Click [Next].

3. Select the network interface to configure: [WIRED LAN] or [WIRELESS LAN] (Wireless option available only if AJ-WM50 module is attached).

4. Click [Next]. The current settings for the selected interface are displayed.

5. Click [Change]. The setting change screen appears.

Wired LAN Settings:

[PROJECTOR NAME] (1): Enter projector/host name.

[IP VERSION] (2): Select [IPv4], [IPv6], or [IPv4 & IPv6].

IPv4 Settings:

• [DHCP ON]/[OFF] (3): Enable/disable DHCP client.

• [IP ADDRESS] (4): Enter static IPv4 address if DHCP is OFF.

• [SUBNET MASK] (5): Enter subnet mask if DHCP is OFF.

• [DEFAULT GATEWAY] (6): Enter default gateway if DHCP is OFF.

• [DNS1] (7) / [DNS2] (8): Enter primary/secondary IPv4 DNS server addresses.

IPv6 Settings:

• [AUTO CONFIGURATION ON]/[OFF] (9): Enable/disable automatic IPv6 address assignment.

• [TEMPORARY ADDRESS] (10): Select [ON] to use temporary IPv6 address (if Auto Config is ON).

• [IP ADDRESS] (11): Enter static IPv6 address if Auto Config is OFF.

• [PREFIX LENGTH] (12): Enter prefix length if Auto Config is OFF.

• [DEFAULT GATEWAY] (13): Enter IPv6 default gateway if Auto Config is OFF.

• [DNS1] (14) / [DNS2] (15): Enter primary/secondary IPv6 DNS server addresses.

• Click [Back] or [Next] (16) to navigate or confirm.

Wireless LAN Settings:

[KEY] (1): Enter the 8-15 character single-byte alphanumeric connection key.

• Click [Back] or [Next] (2) to navigate or confirm.

Final Step: Click [Submit] on the confirmation screen to apply changes.

Note: Changing LAN settings may cause disconnection. Browser navigation might cause “Page has Expired” warnings; re-navigate from [Network config] if this occurs.


How do I adjust the projector clock using the web control function?

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].

2. [Time Zone] (1): Select the correct time zone from the dropdown list.

3. Click [Set time zone] (2) to apply the selected time zone.

4. [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] (3): Select [ON] to synchronize automatically with an NTP server, or [OFF] for manual setting.

5. If NTP is ON, enter the [NTP SERVER NAME] (4) (IP address or hostname; DNS must be configured if using hostname).

6. If NTP is OFF, enter the desired [Date] (5) and [Time] (6) manually.

7. Click [Set date and time] (7) to apply the NTP settings or the manually entered date/time.

Note: If the time drifts immediately after setting, the internal clock battery may need replacement. Consult your dealer.


How do I perform a network ping test using the web control function?

This function checks network connectivity to specified servers (e.g., E-mail, POP, DNS).

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].

2. In the [Input IP address] (1) field, enter the IP address of the server you want to test.

3. Click [Submit] (2).

4. The results are displayed. Example success (3) shows packets transmitted/received and round-trip times. Example failure (4) shows packet loss.


How do I manage security certificates using the web control function?

Certificates are needed for secure HTTPS communication or for control systems like Crestron Electronics, Inc.

Go to [Detailed set up] → [Certificate].

Options:

[CRT Key generate] (1):

• Click [Execute] to go to the CRT key generation page.

• Click [Execute] again to generate the RSA private key (2048-bit). Takes approx. 2 minutes.

• Confirmation (“CRT key – Generated”) appears. Click [OK].

• View key size and modification date on the main CRT Key page.

• [History]: Allows reverting to the *previous* CRT key once (click [History], then [Apply]). Requires re-generating/re-installing corresponding certificates.

[Self-signed Certificate] (2):

• [Generate]: Click [Execute] to go to the generation page. Fill in details (Common Name, Country, State, Locality, Organization, Org Unit). Click [OK]. Certificate is generated. Valid until Dec 31, 2035 GMT.

• [Information]: Click [Confirm] to view details of the generated certificate. Click [Delete] to remove it (cannot delete if HTTPS is active).

[Server Certificate] (3):

• [Generate Certificate Signing Request]: Click [Execute]. Fill in details (Common Name, etc.). Click [OK]. Save the generated .pem file. Submit this file to your Certification Authority (CA).

• [Server Certificate install]: Click [Choose File], select the server certificate file (.cer, .crt, .pem) received from the CA, click [Open].

• [Intermediate Certificate install]: If provided by the CA, click [Choose File], select the intermediate certificate file, click [Open].

• Click [Execute] to install the certificate(s). Click [OK].

• [Information]: Click [Confirm] to view details (Host name, validity period). Shows [Invalid] if not installed or CRT key mismatch. Shows [Expired] if validity passed. Click [Delete] to remove (cannot delete if HTTPS is active).

Certificate Setup Flow:

1. Generate CRT Key.

2. Choose path:

• **Server Certificate:** Generate Signing Request → Acquire Server Certificate (from CA) → Install Certificate.

• **Self-Signed:** Generate Self-signed Certificate.

3. Select connection method (HTTP/HTTPS).

4. Set HTTPS port number (if using HTTPS).

5. Apply settings.

Note: Installation might depend on browser/computer. Server certificate procedures require interaction with a CA.


How do I configure secure communication (HTTPS) using the web control function?

HTTPS uses SSL/TLS encryption, requiring a certificate to be installed first (either server or self-signed).

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [HTTPS set up].

2. [Connection] (1): Select [HTTPS] to enable secure communication. Select [HTTP] for standard unsecured communication (default).

3. [HTTPS port] (2): Enter the port number for HTTPS (1-65535). Default is 443.

4. Click [Set] (3) to apply the settings.

Note: Changing from HTTPS to HTTP might cause screen display issues; clear the browser cache if this happens.


How do I configure Crestron Connected settings using the web control function?

This page is accessible only if [NETWORK] menu → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [Crestron Connected(TM)] is set to [ON].

Go to [Detailed set up] → [Crestron Connected].

[Control System] Settings (Connecting to Crestron System as Client):

1. [Use TLS] (1): [Enable] for secure connection, [Disable] for unsecured.

2. [IP Address / Hostname] (2): Enter the Crestron system’s IP or hostname.

3. [IP ID] (3): Set the IP ID for the projector (up to 4 digits). Default: 3.

4. [Room ID] (4): Set the Room ID for the projector (up to 32 characters).

5. [Non Secure Port] (5): Set port for unsecured communication. Default: 41794.

6. [Secure Port] (6): Set port for secure communication (TLS enabled). Default: 41796.

7. [Authentication] (7): [Enable]/[Disable] connection authentication.

8. [User Name] (8): Enter username for authentication (if enabled) (up to 20 characters).

9. [Password] (9): Enter password for authentication (if enabled) (up to 20 characters).

10. Click [Submit] (10).

[Server] Settings (Projector accessed as Server by Crestron System):

1. [Use TLS] (1): Fixed to [Disable] if no certificate installed.

2. [IP ID] (2): Set IP ID for the projector.

3. [Non Secure Port] (3): Port for unsecured access. Default: 41794.

4. [Secure Port] (4): Port for secure access (fixed if TLS disabled). Default: 41796.

5. [Authentication] (5): [Enable]/[Disable] access authentication (fixed to Disable if TLS disabled).

6. [User Name] (6): Enter username for access (if auth enabled) (up to 20 characters).

7. [Password] (7): Enter password for access (if auth enabled) (up to 20 characters).

8. [Crestron Fusion in the Cloud (FITC)] (8): [Enable]/[Disable] use of Fusion server.

9. [FITC URL] (9): Enter Fusion server URL (if enabled).

10. Click [Submit] (10).

[Auto Discovery] Settings:

1. [Auto Discovery] (1): [Enable] to allow detection via search protocol, [Disable] otherwise.

2. Click [Submit] (2).

[XIO Cloud] Settings:

1. [XIO Cloud] (1): [Enable]/[Disable] XiO Cloud device management.

2. Click [Submit] (2).

[Proxy] Settings:

1. [Proxy] (1): [Enable]/[Disable] proxy server use.

2. [Proxy Server Name] (2): Enter proxy server name or IPv4 address (if enabled).

3. [Proxy Server Port No.] (3): Enter proxy port number (if enabled).

4. Click [Submit] (4).

Note: [Use TLS], [Authentication], and [Secure Port] interact. Proxy Server Name does not support IPv6.


How do I set up E-mail alerts using the web control function?

Configure the projector to send E-mail alerts to up to two addresses when specific events occur.

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [E-mail set up].

2. [ENABLE] (1): Select [Enable] to activate E-mail alerts.

3. [SMTP SERVER NAME] (2): Enter the IP address or hostname of your SMTP server (DNS must be configured if using hostname).

4. [MAIL FROM] (3): Enter the sender E-mail address for the alerts (up to 63 single-byte characters).

5. [MEMO] (4): Enter optional info like location (up to 63 single-byte characters).

6. Temperature Warning Settings:

[MINIMUM TIME] (5): Set the minimum interval (30-999 minutes, default 60) between temperature warning E-mails.

[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE] (6): Set the temperature threshold (°C/°F) for sending the warning E-mail.

7. Recipient Addresses & Conditions: Configure up to two addresses ([E-MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2] (7)). For each address:

[MAIL CONTENTS] (8): Choose [NORMAL] for detailed status or [SIMPLE] for minimal info.

[ERROR] (8): Check to send E-mail on self-diagnosis error.

[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE] (8): Check to send E-mail when intake temperature threshold is reached.

[PERIODIC REPORT] (8): Check days and select times (hourly checkboxes) to send regular status reports.

8. Click [Submit] (9) to save settings and send a confirmation E-mail.


How do I set up E-mail server authentication using the web control function?

Configure POP or SMTP authentication if required by your E-mail service provider.

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [Authentication set up].

2. [Auth] (1): Select the required authentication method ([OFF], [PLAIN], [LOGIN], [CRAM-MD5], [POP before SMTP]).

3. [SMTP Auth] (2): Check this box if SMTP authentication is selected/required.

4. [POP server name] (3): Enter the POP server name (if using POP before SMTP).

5. [User name] (4): Enter the username for the POP or SMTP server.

6. [Password] (5): Enter the password for the POP or SMTP server.

7. [SMTP server port] (6): Enter the SMTP server port number (usually 25).

8. [POP server port] (7): Enter the POP server port number (usually 110).

9. Click [Submit] (8) to apply the settings.


What information is included in the E-mail alerts?

The content depends on the [MAIL CONTENTS] setting ([SIMPLE] or [NORMAL]) and the trigger event.

Example (SIMPLE Configuration Report):

Includes Projector Type, Serial No., E-mail Setup Data (Temperature Warning settings, Periodic Report schedule), Network Configuration (Wired IPv4/IPv6, Wireless – DHCP status, IP, MAC, Auto Config status), Error Information (SELF TEST result), Timestamp, and Memo.

Example (SIMPLE Error Report):

Includes Projector Type, Serial No., Network Configuration (Wired IPv4/IPv6, Wireless), Error Information (SELF TEST result with specific error code and description, e.g., U081 Low AC voltage warning), Timestamp, and Memo.

(NORMAL reports contain more detailed status information not shown in these examples).


How do I limit user functions using the web control function?

This page allows limiting functions for standard user accounts.

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [User function set up].

2. [Remote preview lite] (1): Select [Disable] to prevent standard users from accessing the remote preview lite function. Select [Enable] to allow access.

3. Click [Submit] (2) to apply the setting.


How do I set up status notifications (push alerts) using the web control function?

Configure push notifications of status changes (like errors) to linked application software (e.g., Multi Monitoring & Control Software).

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [Status notification].

2. [Error alert notification] (1): Select [Enable] to activate push notifications for errors.

3. [Notification IP address] (2): Enter the IP address of the destination software/server.

4. [Notification port] (3): Enter the port number of the destination.

5. Click [Submit] (4) to apply the settings.


How do I configure network security (Command Protect) using the web control function?

This setting controls authentication for LAN command control.

1. Go to [Detailed set up] → [Network security].

2. [COMMAND PROTECT] (1):

[DISABLE]: Connects in non-protect mode (no authentication required). Less secure.

[ENABLE]: Connects in protect mode. Requires administrator username/password authentication for commands.

3. Click [Submit] (2). If [DISABLE] was selected, a confirmation screen appears; click [OK] to proceed.

Note: Use [DISABLE] with awareness of the security risks. Refer to “Control commands via LAN” for details.


How do I change passwords using the web control function?

Click [Set up password] (requires login).

If logged in as Administrator:

1. Select the account type to change: [Administrator] (1), [User] (2), or [PJLink] (3).

2. Click [Next] (4).

For Administrator:

a. Enter current username and password in the [Current] section (2).

b. Enter the desired new username (up to 16 single-byte chars) in [New] → [User name] (3).

c. Enter the new password (up to 16 single-byte chars) in [New] → [Password] and [Password(Retype)] (3).

d. Click [Change] (4).

For User:

a. Enter the desired new username (up to 16 single-byte chars) in [New] → [User name] (2).

b. Enter the new password (up to 16 single-byte chars) in [New] → [Password] and [Password(Retype)] (2).

c. Click [Change] (3).

For PJLink:

a. Enter the desired new password (up to 32 half-width chars) in [New] → [Password] (2). Leave blank for no authentication.

b. Click [Change] (3).

If logged in as Standard User:

1. Enter the current password in [Old Password] (1).

2. Enter the desired new password (up to 16 single-byte chars) in [New Password] (2) and [Retype] (3).

3. Click [Change] (4).

Note: Changing the administrator password requires updating login info in any connected application software (e.g., Multi Monitoring & Control Software).


How do I download the open source software license information?

Click [License] in the web control interface.

1. Click [Download] (1).

2. Specify a destination to save the license file.

Note: The license is provided as a text file compressed in zip format (License.zip).


CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD PANASONIC PT-RQ18K (01) PDF MANUAL


Leave comments, questions, reviews, tips, tricks, hacks or page errors below. Account not required.